Yamaha S970 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: S970

Categorie: Speelgoed onderdelen

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Workstation!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of

the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you

keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5 – 6.

Merci d'avoir choisi ce Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel Yamaha !

Nous vous conseillons de lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi afin de tirer pleinement profit

des fonctions avancées et très utiles de votre instrument. Nous vous recommandons

également de garder ce manuel à portée de main pour toute référence ultérieure.

Avant d'utiliser l'instrument, lisez attentivement la section « PRÉCAUTIONS

D'USAGE » aux pages 5 et 6.

English

Français

Digital Workstation

Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel

Owner’s Manual

Mode d'emploi

2 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or

adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name

plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where any-

one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or con-

necting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not

recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum

wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller

the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied

or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a

cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instruc-

tions that accompany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct

at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to

change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obli-

gation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound

levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate

for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is

uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches

are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No

other uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to

how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as

designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and

are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual

carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and

environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products

and the production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we

want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which

(if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type

of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the

replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of

these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being

charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for

the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed

correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in over-

heating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all

batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly

and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any

retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery dis-

posal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some

reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please

observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the

disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If

your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha

directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The

model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are

located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

For PSR-S970/PSR-S770

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 2 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifica-

tions not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your author-

ity, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class

"B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements pro-

vides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in harmful

interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gen-

erates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic

devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be deter-

mined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker

or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute

this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate

retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Elec-

tronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park,

CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distrib-

uted by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

For AC adaptor and PSR-S970/PSR-S770

For PSR-S970/PSR-S770

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-S970/S770

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA

CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 3 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

4 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and main-

tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-

ature accompanying the product.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-

pod, bracket, or table specified by

the manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the

cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-

vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-

aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is

damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen

into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For AC adaptor

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

(can_b_01)

(fcc_sengen)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 4 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 5

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

For AC adaptor

WARNING

• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do

not use for any other purpose.

• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.

CAUTION

• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some

trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the

instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor

is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the

minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using

the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall

AC outlet.

For PSR-S970/PSR-S770

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the

following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also,

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on

it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 111) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)

containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as

water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall

over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected

by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

DMI-5 1/2

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 5 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

6 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

•

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing

so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Do not place objects in front of the instrument's air vent, since this may prevent

adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the

instrument overheating.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to

the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the

provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired

listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or

keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the

instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

DMI-5

2/2

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.

 Handling

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile

phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may

generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your

iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON”

on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent

the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable

operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

 Maintenance

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• The edited Songs/Styles/Voices/Multi Pads and MIDI settings are lost when you turn

off the power to the instrument. This also occurs when the power is turned off by the

Auto Power Off function (page 17). Save the edited data to the instrument, or to a USB

flash drive (page 28). However, the data saved to the instrument may be lost due to

some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto a USB flash

drive. For information about the handling of USB flash drive, refer to page 100.

• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that

you save your important data onto spare USB flash drive or an external device

such as a computer as backup data.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Location

Connections

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(bottom_en_01)

The model number, serial number, power requirements,

etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is

at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial

number in the space provided below and retain this

manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 6 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 7

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Online Member Product Registration

The “PRODUCT ID” on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.

•Music rest

• AC adaptor, power cord

May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer.

About the Manuals

This instrument has the following document and instructional materials.

 Included Document

Owner’s Manual (this book)

Provides overall explanations of the PSR-S970/S770 basic functions.

 Online Materials (PDF)

Reference Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Explains advanced features of the instrument, not explained in the Owner’s Manual. For example, you can learn how

to create original Styles, Songs or Multi Pads, or find detailed explanations of specific parameters.

Data List

Contains various preset content lists such as Voices, Styles, Effects, as well as MIDI-related information.

Computer-related Operations

Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transmitting/receiving

MIDI data.

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such as an iPhone, iPad, etc.

To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the desired files.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from

those on your instrument.

• The displays are taken from the PSR-S970, and are in English.

• iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/

Instruction conventions in this manual

Throughout this manual, instructions with multiple steps are given in convenient shorthand, with arrows indicating the proper sequence.

Example: [FUNCTION]  TAB [ F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E][F] BACKUP/RESTORE

The example above describes a four step operation:

1) Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2) Press the TAB [F] button to select the MENU 2 tab.

3) Press the [G] (SYSTEM) button.

4) Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the BACKUP/RESTORE tab.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 7 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

8 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Formats

“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification

that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice

selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more

Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well

into the future.

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM spe-

cifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and

effects.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expand-

ability for the future. This instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played.

“SFF (Style File Format)” is an original Style file format by Yamaha which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-

quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. “SFF GE (Guitar Edition)” is an enhanced format of

SFF, which features improved note transposition for guitar tracks.

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for

your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others'

copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or

recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product.

* The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score

data, etc.

* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha

Corporation is not required in such cases.

• The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for some of the songs pre-installed in this instrument:

Beauty And The Beast

from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST

Lyrics by Howard Ashman

Music by Alan Menken

What Makes You Beautiful

Words and Music by Savan Kotecha, Rami Yacoub and Carl Falk

All Rights for MR. KANANI SONGS Controlled and Administered by EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

All Rights for RAMI PRODUCTIONS AB Administered by KOBALT SONGS MUSIC PUBLISHING

All Rights for AIR CHRYSALIS SCANDINAVIA AB Administered by CHRYSALIS MUSIC GROUP, INC., a BMG CHRYSALIS

COMPANY

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the

device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 8 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 9

Table of Contents

Included Accessories............................................................7

About the Manuals................................................................7

Formats ................................................................................8

Information...........................................................................8

Welcome to Digital Workstation 10

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Setting Up 16

Power Requirements ..........................................................16

Turning the Power On/Off...................................................16

Adjusting the Master Volume .............................................18

Changing the Display Language .........................................18

Playing the Demos..............................................................19

Basic Operations 20

Display-based Controls.......................................................20

Calling Up the Desired Display Instantly — Direct Access..23

Messages Shown in the Display .........................................23

Main Display Configuration ................................................24

File Selection Display Configuration ...................................26

File Management ................................................................27

Entering Characters ............................................................32

Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings..................33

Data Backup .......................................................................34

1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 35

Playing Voices ....................................................................35

Changing the Pitch of the Keyboard ...................................38

Using the Wheels................................................................39

Using the LIVE CONTROL Knobs........................................40

Applying Voice Effects ........................................................42

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ........................45

Adding New Contents — Expansion Packs.........................46

2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 48

Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment....................48

Operating Style Playback ....................................................50

Changing the Chord Fingering Type....................................52

Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current

Style (One Touch Setting)...................................................53

Finding Suitable Music Pieces for the Current Style

(Repertoire) ........................................................................54

Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance

(Style Recommender).........................................................55

Turning On/Off Each Channel of the Style...........................56

Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Parts...............57

Setting the Split Point.........................................................58

Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing

Bass with Your Left Hand ...................................................59

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ...............................60

3 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 62

Playback of Songs..............................................................62

Displaying Music Notation (Score) .....................................64

Displaying Lyrics/Text ........................................................65

Turning Each Channel of the Song On/Off ..........................65

One-handed Practice with the Guide Function ....................66

Repeat Playback .................................................................67

Recording Your Performance .............................................68

4 USB Audio Player/Recorder

– Playing Back and Recording Audio Files – 71

Playing Back Audio Files .................................................... 71

Recording Your Performance as Audio.............................. 74

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

Playing the Multi Pads ....................................................... 76

Using Chord Match............................................................ 77

Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function ...................... 77

Creating a Multi Pad with Audio files

(Audio Link Multi Pad)....................................................... 78

Music Finder

– Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

Selecting the Desired Record (Panel Settings)................... 80

Searching for Records (Panel Settings)............................. 81

Downloading Records (Panel Settings) from the Website . 82

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File to a Record........... 83

7 Registration Memory

– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 85

Registering Your Panel Setups .......................................... 85

Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file.................. 86

Recalling a Registered Panel Setup.................................... 87

8 Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or

Guitar with the Instrument – 88

Connecting a Microphone/Guitar ....................................... 88

Setting Up for Using a Microphone/Guitar......................... 89

Using the Talk function ...................................................... 90

Using Vocal Harmony (PSR-S970) .................................... 91

Using Synth Vocoder (PSR-S970) ..................................... 93

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Basic Procedure................................................................. 95

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL jacks)

.... 97

Connecting Audio Devices

(OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack) ...................... 98

Connecting an External Monitor

([RGB OUT] terminal) (PSR-S970) .................................... 99

Connecting a Microphone or Guitar

([MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack) .............................................. 99

Connecting USB Devices ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal) .... 100

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad ([USB TO DEVICE],

[USB TO HOST] and MIDI terminals)............................... 102

Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal)..... 102

Connecting External MIDI Devices

(MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals) ............................................ 103

11 Other Functions – Making Global Settings and

Using Advanced Features – 104

Basic Procedure............................................................... 104

Function List .................................................................... 105

Direct Access Chart 106

Troubleshooting 107

Specifications 110

Index 112

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 9 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

10 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Welcome to Digital Workstation

The PSR-S970/S770 has a comprehensive and sonically

stunning set of authentic Voices, and gives you the tools to

play these Voices more naturally and with greater

expressiveness.

The Styles of the PSR-S970/S770 make it possible to perform

in a wide variety of music genres with full instrumental

accompaniment, just by playing chords. Moreover, the PSR-

S970 features Audio Styles which bring a fresh level of realism

and expressiveness, featuring actual audio recordings of top-

class studio musicians. These impart all the original feel,

ambience and excitement to the drums and percussion parts

of the Style, and retain the subtle nuances and grooves that

are difficult to reproduce using the preset drum kits.

The PSR-S970/S770 is an open-ended instrument that lets you continually expand the available content for your creative

explorations. Featured on our special website (http://www.yamaha.com/awk/) are many Voices and Styles (called

Expansion Pack data) that you can get and load to the PSR-S970/S770. By using the “Yamaha Expansion Manager”

software, you can manage the variety of Expansion Packs and create your own custom Pack for installing on your

instrument.

The PSR-S970/S770 has new and high-quality effect types, including Real Distortion and Real Reverb. On the PSR-S970,

these also include VCM effects that use the same technology as the professional-level processing on Yamaha’s high-end

mixers. It is provided with beautifully designed virtual panel displays, with highly intuitive controls—just like actual effect

devices.

Audio files (WAV or MP3 format) saved to a USB flash drive can

be played back on the instrument. You can also record your

performance as audio files (WAV format) to a USB flash drive—

making it easy to edit your recordings on computer as desired,

and share them over the Internet, or burn your own original CDs.

The instrument also provides a variety of advanced, convenient

audio playback and processing functions, including Time Stretch,

which lets you slow down or speed up an audio file without

changing the pitch, and Pitch Shift, which allows you to change

the pitch without affecting the time. Moreover, a Vocal Cancel

function effectively attenuates the vocals which may be

positioned in the center of a file, allowing you to sing “karaoke”

style with just instrumental backing.

Extraordinarily expressive and realistic Voices page 35

Play along with a backing band page 48

Voice and Style expandability page 46

Powerful DSP effect for enhancing the sound page 42

Audio playing and recording with a USB flash drive page 71

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 10 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 11

Welcome to Digital Workstation

You can directly connect a microphone and use a variety of

sophisticated processing tools. The PSR-S970 features an

amazing Vocal Harmony function, which automatically produces

backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that you sing into a

microphone. You can even change the gender of the harmony

voices — for example, adding female backup to your own male

voice (or vice versa) — or use the Vocal Doubler to make your

single voice sound like many. The PSR-S970 also has a Synth

Vocoder feature, recreating that popular effect for a variety of

luscious, other-worldly sounds.

Both the PSR-S970 and PSR-S770 let you connect an electric

guitar, and you can even use powerful DSP effects to process the

guitar sound instead, and play that along with the keyboard

sounds.

The two knobs to which various functions can be assigned

lets you intuitively control your performance in real-time. For

example, you can use the knobs to control the brightness

(cutoff frequency) of the sound being played or to control the

volume balance between the parts such as Voice and Style.

Thus you can easily add variations to the sound without

interrupting your performance.

You can also control your performance easily by using the

two wheels — PITCH BEND and MODULATION. The [PITCH

BEND] wheel lets you bend the notes up or down, while the

[MODULATION] wheel can be used to apply a vibrato effect

to the notes you play (page 39).

You can play arpeggios (broken chords) by simply

pressing the appropriate notes on the keyboard,

allowing you to instantly and automatically have

complex and otherwise difficult-to-play phrases

backing your performance.

These are just a few of the many functions that enhance your musical enjoyment and expand your

creative and performance possibilities. Try them out and enjoy your new keyboard!

Connect a microphone and sing along with your keyboard performance

page 88

Versatile real-time controller — Live Control page 40

Playing with Arpeggios

page 44

Explore the Demos page 19

The Demos showcase the instrument’s high-quality sounds, the variety of advanced functions, and provide helpful

information for learning about your new keyboard.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 11 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

12 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

 Top Panel

[ ] (Standby/On) switch ..............................Page 16

Turns on the instrument’s power or sets to standby.

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................Page 18

Adjusts the overall volume.

[DEMO] button ................................................Page 19

Calls up the display for selecting a Demo.

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button (PSR-S970) /

[MIC SETTING] button (PSR-S770)

.....................Page 88

Calls up the display from which you can make settings for

the microphone/guitar and (on the PSR-S970) Vocal Har-

mony settings.

SONG buttons.................................................Page 62

Selects a Song and controls Song playback.

STYLE category selection buttons ...............Page 48

Selects a Style category.

[TAP TEMPO]/TEMPO buttons ......................Page 51

Controls the tempo for Style, Song and Metronome playback.

TRANSPOSE buttons .....................................Page 38

Transposes the entire pitch of the instrument in semitone

steps.

[METRONOME] button................................... Page 37

Turns the metronome on or off.

[FADE IN/OUT] button.................................... Page 52

Controls fade in/out of Style/Song playback.

[OTS LINK] button ..........................................Page 54

Turns on/off the OTS Link function.

STYLE CONTROL buttons............................. Page 50

Controls Style playback.

[ASSIGN] button, LIVE CONTROL knobs..... Page 40

Assigns functions and controls sounds in real time.

[PITCH BEND] wheel......................................Page 39

Bends the pitch of the keyboard played sound up or down.

[MODULATION] wheel ................................... Page 39

Applies vibrato effects, etc.

[PHONES] jack ............................................... Page 15

For connecting a pair of headphones.

LCD and related controls .............................. Page 20

[BAL.] button .......................................... Pages 57, 74

Calls up settings for the volume balance among the parts.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 12 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 13

Panel Controls and Terminals

[MIXER/EQ] button .........................................Page 95

Calls up various settings for the keyboard, Style and Song

parts.

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] button...................Pages 56, 65

Calls up settings for turning Style/Song channels on or off.

[FUNCTION] button ......................................Page 104

Lets you make advanced settings and create your original

Styles, Songs and Multi Pads.

VOICE category selection buttons................Page 36

Selects a Voice category.

[USB AUDIO PLAYER] button........................Page 71

Calls up the display for playing back audio files and record-

ing your performance in audio format.

[USB] button ................................................. Page 101

Calls up the display for selecting a file in the USB flash

drive.

VOICE EFFECT buttons .................................Page 42

Applies various effects to the keyboard performance.

[MUSIC FINDER] button................................. Page 80

Calls up ideal panel setups for your performance.

PART SELECT buttons .................................. Page 36

Selects a keyboard part.

PART ON/OFF buttons ................................... Page 35

Turns the keyboard part on or off.

REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons ............... Page 85

Registers and recalls panel setups.

MULTI PAD CONTROL buttons ..................... Page 76

Selects and plays a rhythmic or melodic Multi Pad phrase.

ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons..................... Page 53

Calls up the appropriate panel settings for the Style.

UPPER OCTAVE buttons ...............................Page 38

Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps.

Panel Setup (Panel Settings)

By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings as

described here. These settings of the instrument are together referred to as

“panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 13 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

14 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

 Rear Panel

DC IN jack .......................................................Page 16

For connecting the power adaptor.

FOOT PEDAL [1]/[2] jacks..............................Page 97

For connecting Footswitches and/or Foot controllers.

OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks .............................Page 98

For connecting external audio devices.

[AUX IN] jack...................................................Page 98

For connecting an external audio device, such as a portable

audio player.

[MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.............................. Page 88

For connecting a microphone or guitar.

[GAIN] knob ....................................................Page 88

For adjusting the input level of the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT]

jack.

[MIC GUITAR] switch .....................................Page 88

For switching between “MIC” and “GUITAR” for proper

use of the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.

Air Vents

NOTICE

This instrument has special air vents in the top panel and rear panel.

Do not place objects where they might block the air vent, since this

may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and

possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Attaching the Music Rest

Insert the music rest into the slots as shown.

Air Vents

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 14 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 15

Panel Controls and Terminals

MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals.............................Page 103

For connecting external MIDI devices.

[USB TO HOST] terminal..............................Page 102

For connecting to a computer.

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal ..........................Page 100

For connecting a USB device such as a USB flash drive.

[RGB OUT] terminal (PSR-S970) ...................Page 99

For connecting to an external monitor.

Using the Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES] jack.

CAUTION

Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss.

Standard stereo phone plug

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 15 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

16 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the illustration.

1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN”.

2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power.

After the Main display appears, adjust the volume as desired while playing the

keyboard.

3 After you finish using the instrument, turn off the power by

pressing and holding the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for about a

second.

Power Requirements

WARNING

Use the specified AC adaptor (page 111) only. Using the wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating.

CAUTION

When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immedi-

ately turn the power off and disconnect the plug from the outlet.

NOTE

Follow the order shown above in reverse when disconnecting the AC adaptor.

AC adaptor

DC IN jack

(page 14)

AC Outlet

The shape of the plug and outlet differs depending on your area.

Power cord

Turning the Power On/Off

NOTE

Do not press the foot pedal or move

the [PITCH BEND] wheel, etc. when

turning the power on. Doing so may

cause the instrument to malfunction.

NOTE

Until the Main display appears, no

operations can be carried out, includ-

ing power-off and keyboard perfor-

mance.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 16 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 17

Setting Up

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power

Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated

for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses before the power is

automatically turned off is approximately 30 minutes by default; however, you can

change the setting.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E] CONFIG 1

2 Press the [B] button several times to select “4 AUTO POWER

OFF.”

3 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the value.

If you do not want to turn the power off automatically (disable the Auto Power

Off), select DISABLED.

Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the display.

CAUTION

Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the prod-

uct for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

NOTICE

While recording or editing, or while a message is displayed, the power cannot be turned off even if you press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch. If you want to turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch after recording, editing, or after the message has disap-

peared. If you need to force-quit the instrument, hold down the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for longer than three seconds. Note that the

force-quit operation might cause data loss and damage to the instrument.

Setting the Auto Power Off function

NOTICE

Any data which has not been

saved to the USER or USB drive

will be lost if the power automat-

ically turns off. Make sure to

save your data before the power

turns off (page 28).

Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method)

Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key on the keyboard. A message appears briefly, then the

instrument starts up with the Auto Power Off function disabled.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 17 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

18 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial while playing the keyboard.

This determines the language (English, German, French, Spanish and Italian are available) used in the display for

messages.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E] OWNER

2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select the desired language.

Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the display.

Adjusting the Master Volume

CAUTION

Do not use the instrument at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss.

Changing the Display Language

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 18 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 19

Setting Up

The Demos provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features and functions as well as dynamic

demonstrations of the high-quality sounds.

1 Press the [DEMO] button to call up the Demo display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [E] buttons to show a specific Demo.

Pressing one of the [F] – [J] buttons plays back the overview Demo

continuously, calling up the various displays in sequence.

Sub menus may be shown on the display. Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons

corresponding to the desired sub menu.

3 Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the Demo

display.

Playing the Demos

NOTE

To return to the higher level menu,

press the [EXIT] button.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 19 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

20 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operations

The LCD provides comprehensive at-a-glance information on all current settings. The displayed menu can be

selected or changed by the controls around the LCD.

The [A] – [J] buttons are used to select the corresponding menu items shown next to them.

• Example 1

• Example 2

Display-based Controls

[A] – [J] buttons

TAB [ E][F] buttons

[DIRECT ACCESS]

button (page 23)

Data dial and [ENTER] button [1 ] – [8 ] buttons

[EXIT] button

[A] – [J] buttons

In the File Selection display (page 26),

the [A] – [J] buttons can be used to select

the corresponding files.

The [A] and [B] buttons are used to

move the cursor up or down.

The [F] and [H] buttons are used to select

the corresponding parameter.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 20 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 21

Basic Operations

These buttons are used to change the pages of displays that have “tabs” at the top.

The [1 ] – [8 ] buttons are used to make selections or adjust settings (up or down correspondingly) for

functions shown directly above them.

TAB [

][

] buttons



] – [8



] buttons

For menus that appear in this section of

the display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons.

For menus that appear in this section of the

display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons.

For list menus that appear, use the [1 ] – [8 ]

buttons to select the desired item.

For parameters that appear in slider (or knob)

form, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust

the value.

To reset the desired parameter value to its

default, simultaneously press both the [] and

[] buttons below it.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 21 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

22 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Depending on the selected display, the Data dial can be used in the following two ways.

• Selecting files (Voice, Style, Song, and so on)

When one of the File Selection displays (page 26) is shown, you can use the Data dial and the [ENTER] button to

select a file.

• Adjusting parameter values

You can conveniently use the Data dial in tandem with the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust parameters

indicated in the display.

This convenient technique also works well with pop-up parameters such as Tempo and Transpose. Simply press the

appropriate button (ex., TEMPO [+]), then rotate the Data dial to set the value.

Data dial and [ENTER] button

Rotate the Data dial to move the

cursor.

Press the [ENTER] button to actu-

ally select the file. The selected file

is highlighted.

Rotate the Data dial to adjust the

selected parameter.

Select the desired parameter with the appropriate [1 ] –

[8 ] button.

[EXIT] button

Pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the previously indicated display.

Pressing the [EXIT] button several times returns to the default Main display

(page 24).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 22 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 23

Basic Operations

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single

additional button press. Refer to the “Direct Access Chart” on page 106 for a list of the displays that can be called

up with the Direct Access function.

1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.

A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button.

2 Press the button (or move the knob, wheel or connected pedal)

corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up

that display.

For example, pressing the [GUIDE] button calls up the display in which the

Guide mode can be set.

A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the

message appears, simply press the appropriate button.

Calling Up the Desired Display Instantly — Direct Access

Messages Shown in the Display

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 23 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

24 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

The display that appears when the power is turned on is the Main display. This

display shows the current basic settings such as the currently selected Voice and

Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The Main display is the one you’ll

usually see when you play the keyboard.

Song name and related information

Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. Pressing

the [A] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 62).

BAR/BEAT/Tempo

Displays the current position (bar/beat/tempo) in Style playback or Song

playback.

Current chord name

When the [ACMP] button is set to on, the chord specified in the chord section

of the keyboard will be displayed. When the Song containing the chord data is

played, the current chord name will be displayed.

Split Point

Displays the Split Point positions (page 58).

MIC/Guitar input level indicator (PSR-S970)

When a microphone/guitar is connected, this indicates the input level. Adjust

the level with the [GAIN] knob on the rear panel so that the indicator lights in

green or yellow (but not in red). For details on connecting a microphone/guitar,

refer to page 88. Pressing the [B]/[C]/[D] buttons calls up the Vocal Harmony

Type Selection display.

Style name and related information

Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing

the [E] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 48).

Voice name

Displays the Voice names currently selected for RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT

parts (page 35). Use the [F], [G] and [H] buttons to call up the Voice Selection

display for the corresponding part: Press the button once to highlight the part’s

Voice, then once more to call up the Voice Selection display.

Main Display Configuration

NOTE

You can quickly call up the Main dis-

play by pressing the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, followed by the

[EXIT] button.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 24 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 25

Basic Operations

Multi Pad Bank name

Displays the names of the selected Multi Pad Bank. Pressing the [I] button calls

up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display (page 76).

Registration Memory Bank name

Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name and

Registration Memory number. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration

Memory Bank Selection display (page 86).

Volume Balance or Channel On/Off settings

Displays the volume balance (page 57) or channel on/off settings (pages 56,

65) among the parts. Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to change the settings.

LIVE CONTROL knob information

Indicates the currently selected number of the eight available LIVE

CONTROL knob assignments (page 40).

Vocal Harmony type (PSR-S970)

Displays the currently selected Vocal Harmony type (page 91).

USB Audio Player/Recorder information

Displays information for the selected audio file in the connected USB flash

drive (page 71), including the elapsed playback time, file name and Repeat

mode icon. When the audio recording is in standby, a “WAITING” indication

appears. While recording, “RECORDING” appears.

Transpose

Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 38).

Upper Octave

Displays the amount that the octave value is shifted (page 38).

Registration Sequence

Appears when the Registration Sequence is active. For instructions on

programming the sequence, refer to the Reference Manual on the website,

Chapter 7.

NOTE

Press the [BAL.] button to call up the

Volume Balance displays, and press

the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call

up the CHANNEL ON/OFF displays.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 25 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

26 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

The File Selection display is for selecting Voice, Styles, and other data. The File Selection display appears when

you press one of the VOICE or STYLE category selection buttons, the SONG [SELECT] button, etc.

Location (drive) of data

• PRESET..........Location where pre-programmed (preset) data is stored.

• USER...............Location where recorded or edited data is saved. Installed

Expansion Voices or Styles are also saved here in the Expan-

sion folder.

•USB.................Location where data on USB flash drive is saved. This

appears only when a USB flash drive is connected to the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal.

Selectable data (files)

The files that can be selected on this display are shown. If more than 10 files

exist, the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) are shown below the files. Pressing the

corresponding button changes the display page. When other pages follow, the

“Next” button appears, and for the previous page, the “Prev.” button appears.

MENU 1/MENU 2

At the bottom of the File Selection display, you can toggle the indication

between MENU 1 and MENU 2 by pressing the [8 ] button. Selecting

MENU 1 shows the function names related to the current file (Voice, Style,

Song, etc.) while selecting MENU 2 shows the function names of the file/

folder management (page 27).

File Selection Display Configuration

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

NOTE

By pressing the [USB] button, you can

also access Voices, Styles, and other

data files which are saved in the USB

flash drive (page 101).

NOTE

The data, both pre-programmed and

your own original, are saved as “files.”

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 26 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 27

Basic Operations

You can save, name, copy, move, delete files, and you can create folders to manage the files with the buttons located

lower area in the File Selection display. For information on the File Selection display, refer to page 26.

Calling up the higher level folder

When the files of a folder are displayed, “UP” is shown above the [8 ] button. Pressing this button calls

up the next higher level folder.

Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display

The PRESET Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.

This display shows the Voices in a folder.

The next highest level (in this case, folder) is

shown. Each folder shown in this display contains

appropriately categorized Voices.

File Management

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100.

Restrictions for protected Songs

Preset Songs and most commercially available songs are copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental

erasure. They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the file names. The indications and relevant

restrictions are detailed below.

•Prot. 1: Indicates Preset Songs copied to the USER drive. These only can be copied/moved/deleted in the USER

drive.

• Prot. 2 Orig: Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved

only to the USER drive and USB flash drives with ID.

• Prot. 2 Edit: Indicates edited “Prot.2 Orig” Song. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the

USER drive and USB flash drives with ID.

NOTE

• Make sure that the “Prot.2 Orig” Song and the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song reside in the same folder. Otherwise, the “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back.

If you move this type of Song, make sure to move both the “Prot.2 Orig” and “Prot.2 Edit” Songs to the same folder.

• Do not change the “Prot2.Orig” Song name and icon on the display. Otherwise, the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 27 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

28 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can save your original data (such as Songs you've recorded) as a file to the USER or the USB drive in the File

Selection display (page 26).

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB

[E][F] buttons.

If you want to save the data within an existing folder, select the folder here.

2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of

the display.

If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2.

3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button.

The Character Entry window is called up.

4 Enter the file name (page 32).

Even if you skip this step, you can rename the file at any time after saving it

(page 30).

5 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually save the file.

The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among

the files in alphabetical order.

Saving a File

NOTE

Files cannot be saved to the PRESET

tab or the “Expansion” folder (page 46)

in the USER tab.

NOTE

To cancel the Save operation, press the

[8 ] (CANCEL) button before step 5

below.

NOTE

In the USER tab, the maximum total

number of files which can be stored

differs depending on the file size and

the length of the file names.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 28 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 29

Basic Operations

You can create folders to make it easier to find your original data.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) to which you want to create a new folder by using the TAB

[E][F] buttons.

If you want to create a new folder within an existing folder, also select the

folder here.

2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of

the display.

If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2.

3 Press the [7 ] (FOLDER) button.

The Character Entry window is called up.

4 Enter the name of the new folder (page 32).

The created folder will be automatically located at the appropriate position

among the folders in alphabetical order.

Creating a New Folder

NOTE

A new folder cannot be made in the

PRESET tab or the “Expansion” folder

(page 46) in the USER tab.

NOTE

The maximum number of files/folders

which can be saved in a folder is 500.

NOTE

In the USER tab, no more than three

folder levels can be created. The maxi-

mum total number of files/folders

which can be saved differs depending

on the file size and the length of the

file/folder names.

NOTE

To cancel creating a new folder, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

NOTICE

Do not use “Expansion” for the

folder name. Otherwise, all data

contained in the “Expansion”

folder will be lost when an

Expansion Pack (page 46) is

installed.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 29 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

30 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can rename files/folders.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) which contains the file/folder you want to rename by using

the TAB [E][F] buttons.

2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of

the display.

If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2.

3 Press the [1 ] (NAME) button.

The window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display.

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired

file/folder.

5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection.

The Character Entry window is called up.

6 Enter the name of the selected file or folder (page 32).

The renamed file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the files in alphabetical order.

You can copy or cut files and paste them to another location (folder). You can also copy folders (but not move them)

by using the same procedure.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab

(PRESET, USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want

to copy by using the TAB [E][F] buttons.

2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of

the display.

If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2.

Renaming a File/Folder

NOTE

Files and folders in the PRESET tab or

the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the

USER tab cannot be renamed.

NOTE

To cancel the Rename operation, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

NOTICE

Do not use “Expansion” for the

folder name. Otherwise, all data

contained in the “Expansion”

folder will be lost when an

Expansion Pack (page 46) is

installed.

Copying or Moving Files

NOTE

• Files in the PRESET tab cannot be

moved. They can only be copied.

• Files in the “Expansion” folder

(page 46) in the USER tab cannot be

copied/moved.

• Commercially available song data

may be copy protected to prevent

illegal copying.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 30 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 31

Basic Operations

3 Press the [3 ] (COPY) button to copy or [2 ] (CUT) to move.

The window for the Copy/Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display.

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired

file/folder.

Pressing a button selects (highlights) the file/folder. To cancel the selection,

press the same [A] – [J] button again.

Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current

display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL

OFF) button again.

5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection.

6 Select the destination tab (USER or USB) to paste the file/folder,

by using the TAB [E][F] buttons.

If necessary, select the destination folder by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

7 Press the [4 ] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder selected

in step 4.

The pasted file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position among

the files in alphabetical order.

You can delete individual or multiple files/folders.

1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or

USB) which contains the file/folder you want to delete by using

the TAB [E][F] buttons.

2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of

the display.

If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2.

3 Press the [5 ] (DELETE) button.

The window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display.

NOTE

To cancel the Copy operation, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

Deleting Files/Folders

NOTE

Files and folders in the PRESET tab or

the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the

USER tab cannot be deleted.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 31 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

32 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired

file/folder.

Pressing a button selects (highlights) the file/folder. To cancel the selection,

press the same [A] – [J] button again.

Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current

display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL

OFF) button again.

5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection.

6 Follow the on-display instructions.

• YES..................Delete the file/folder

• YES ALL .........Delete all selected files/folders

•NO....................Leave the file/folder as is without deleting

• CANCEL .........Cancel the Delete operation

This section covers how to enter characters for naming your files/folders, inputting keywords on Music Finder

(page 81), etc. Entering characters is done in the display shown below.

1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1 ] button.

•CASE...............Capital letters, numbers, marks

• case .................Lowercase letters, numbers, marks

2 Use the Data dial to move the cursor to the desired position.

3 Press the [2 ] – [6 ] and [7 ] buttons, corresponding to

the character you wish to enter.

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters

change each time you press the button.

To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another

character-input button. Alternately, you can wait for a short time and the

character will be entered automatically.

For more information on entering characters, refer to “Other character-entry

operations” below.

4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and

return to the previous display.

NOTE

To cancel the Delete operation, press

the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

Entering Characters

1 4

NOTE

When inputting lyrics in the Song Cre-

ator function (see the Reference Man-

ual, Chapter 3), you may also enter

Japanese characters (kana and kanji).

NOTE

• The following marks cannot be

entered for a file/folder name.

\ / : * ? " < >

• File names can contain up to 41

characters and folder names can

contain up to 50 characters.

NOTE

To cancel the character-entering oper-

ation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) but-

ton.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 32 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 33

Basic Operations

• Deleting characters

Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the Data dial, and press

the [7 ] (DELETE) button. To delete all characters on the line at once, press and

hold the [7 ] (DELETE) button.

• Entering marks or spaces

1. Press the [6 ] (SYMBOL) button to call up the mark list.

2. Use the Data dial to move the cursor to the desired mark or space, then press the

[8 ] (OK) button.

• Selecting custom icons for files (shown at left of file name)

1. Press the [1 ] (ICON) button to call up the ICON SELECT display.

2. Select the icon by using the [A] – [J] buttons, [3 ] – [5 ] buttons or Data

dial. The display includes several pages. Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select

different pages.

3. Press the [8 ] (OK) button to apply the selected icon.

While holding the right-most key (C6) on the keyboard, turn the power on. This resets the settings of the entire instrument

(referred to as the System Setup parameters) to their factory default settings. Refer to the “Parameter Chart” in the Data

List on the website for details about which parameters belong to System Setup.

You can also reset specified settings to the factory default value or delete all files and folders in the USER drive.

Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [F] RESET. For

details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11.

Other Character-entry Operations

NOTE

To cancel the operation, press the

[8 ] (CANCEL) button.

Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings

NOTE

The recorded Songs (page 68), Expan-

sion Packs (page 46), and other files

saved to this instrument are not

deleted by this operation.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 33 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

34 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can back up all data saved in the USER drive (except Protected Songs and

Expansion Voices/Styles) and all settings of the instrument to a USB flash drive as a

single file.

1 Connect a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal for

the backup destination.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E][F]

BACKUP/RESTORE

3 Press the [G] (BACK UP) button to save the data to the USB

flash drive.

When confirmation messages appear, follow the on-display instructions.

To do this, press the [I] (RESTORE) button in the BACKUP/RESTORE page (see

above). When confirmation messages appear, follow the on-display instructions.

When the operation is completed, the instrument will be restarted automatically.

Data Backup

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

NOTE

You can also back up files in the USER

drive, such as Voice, Song, Style,

Multi Pad and Registration Memory,

by copying them individually to a USB

flash drive as desired. For instructions,

refer to page 30.

NOTE

You can also back up System settings,

MIDI settings, User Effect settings, and

Music Finder Records individually as

desired. Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2 

[G] SYSTEM  TAB [E][F] SETUP

FILES. For more information, refer to

the Reference Manual on the website,

Chapter 11.

NOTE

Completing the back up/restore opera-

tion may take a few minutes.

Restoring the Backup File

NOTICE

Move the Protected Songs

(saved to the USER drive) to a

USB flash drive before restoring.

If the Songs are not moved, the

operation deletes the data.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 34 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 35

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

Voices

– Playing the keyboard –

The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic

instrumental Voices, including piano, guitar, strings, brass, wind

instruments and more.

The Voices can be played via three keyboard parts: LEFT, RIGHT 1 and 2. You can combine these parts by using

the PART ON/OFF buttons to create luscious instrument textures and convenient performance combinations.

• To play one single Voice on the entire keyboard:

Turn on the RIGHT 1 or 2 part.

• To play two different Voices in layer on the entire keyboard (Layer):

Turn on the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts.

• To play different Voices in the right- and left-hand sections of the key-

board (Split):

Turn on the LEFT and RIGHT (1 and/or 2) parts. The F#2 and lower keys are used

for the LEFT part while the upper keys (excluding F#2) are used for the RIGHT 1

and 2 parts. The key which divides the keyboard into the left-hand and right-hand

sections is referred to as the “Split Point.”

1 Turn on the PART ON/OFF button corresponding to the part you

want to use.

The corresponding PART SELECT button is automatically turned on.

Playing Voices

NOTE

For a list of preset Voices of this

instrument, refer to the “Voice List” in

the Data List on the website.

RIGHT 2 part

RIGHT 1 part

LEFT part

Right-hand (UPPER) section

Split Point (F#2 by default)

For selecting the keyboard part to

change the Voice

For turning on/off the keyboard parts

Left-hand (LOWER) section

NOTE

The Split Point can be changed

(page 58).

NOTE

You can save the Voice selection and

on/off setting for each part to Registra-

tion Memory (page 85).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 35 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

36 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

2 Make sure that the PART SELECT button corresponding to the

part you want to select the Voice is turned on.

3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a

Voice category and call up the Voice Selection display.

The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Voice

category selection buttons correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For

example, press the [STRINGS] button to display various strings Voices.

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

You can call up the other pages by pressing the buttons that correspond to the

page numbers (P1, P2 ...) or by pressing the same VOICE category selection

button several times.

5 If necessary, repeat steps 1 – 4 above to select the Voice for the

other part.

6 Play the keyboard.

NOTE

By pressing the [8 ] (UP) button in

the Voice Selection display, you can

call up the Voice categories (folders),

including “GM&XG” and “GM2,”

which do not have any VOICE category

selection buttons.

NOTE

If you pressed the [ORGAN FLUTES]

button in step 3, press the [I] (PRE-

SETS) button before proceeding to

step 4.

 Expansion Voices

Voices additionally installed (page 46).

 User Voices

Voices created with the Voice Set function

(refer to the Reference Manual on the web-

site), or Voices copied to the USER drive

(page 30).

Preset Voices

NOTE

The Voice characteristics are indicated

above the Preset Voice name. For

details on the characteristics, see

page 37.

NOTE

You can call up the information for the

selected Voice by pressing the [6 ]

(INFO) button. (Some Voices do not

have an information window.)

To listen to the demo phrases for each Voice

Press the [7 ] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. To stop the demo, press the [7 ]

button again.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 36 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 37

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

The Voice characteristics are indicated above the Voice name — S.Art!, MegaVoice, Live!, Cool!, Sweet!, etc.

• S.Art! (Super Articulation) Voices

The word “articulation” in music usually refers to the transition or continuity

between notes. This is often reflected in specific performance techniques, such as

staccato, legato and slur. You can call up helpful information on how to play these

Voices by pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button on the Voice Selection display.

• Drums/Live!Drums/SFX/Live!SFX Voices (called up via the [DRUM KIT]

button)

These let you play various drums and percussion instruments or SFX (sound effects)

sounds on the keyboard, collected together in what are called Drum/SFX kits. For

details, see the “Drum/SFX Kit List” of the Data List on the website.

• Organ Flutes Voices (called up via the [ORGAN FLUTES] button)

These let you recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage

levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. For details, refer

to page 45.

For information about other Voice types, refer to the Reference Manual on the

website.

Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold)

By turning on the PART ON/OFF [LEFT HOLD] button when the LEFT part is ON, the LEFT part Voice is held

even when the keys are released. Non-decaying Voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type

Voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed).

This function is convenient when used along with Style playback since the sound of the chord matching Style

playback is maintained. To stop the LEFT part Voice which is sounding, stop Style or Song playback, or turn the

[LEFT HOLD] button off.

Using the Metronome

You can start or stop the metronome by pressing the [METRONOME] button. The metronome tempo can be

adjusted by the same procedure as with Style tempo (page 51).

NOTE

You can also change the time signature, volume and sound of the metronome: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E] CONFIG 1 

[A]/[B] 2 METRONOME

Voice Characteristics

NOTE

• S.Art! Voices are only compatible

with other models which have those

types of Voices installed. Any Song

or Style data you’ve created on the

instrument using these Voices will

not sound properly when played

back on other instruments.

• S.Art! Voices sound differently

depending on the keyboard range,

velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you

turn on HARMONY/ARPEGGIO

(page 42), change the transpose set-

ting (page 38) or change the Voice

Set parameters (page 47), unex-

pected or undesired sounds may

result.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 37 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

38 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons transpose the overall pitch of the instrument (the

keyboard sound, Style playback, Song playback, and so on) between -12 and 12 in

semitone steps. To instantly reset the transpose value to 0, press the [+] and [-]

buttons simultaneously.

The UPPER OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons allow you to shift the pitch of the RIGHT 1

and 2 parts up or down by one octave.

By default, the pitch of the entire instrument is set to 440.0 Hz according to equal

temperament. This basic tuning can be changed in the display called up via

[FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE. The

pitch can be shifted up or down between 414.8Hz and 466.8Hz in approximately 0.2

Hz increments. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Changing the Pitch of the Keyboard

Adjusting the Pitch in Semitones (Transpose)

NOTE

The Transpose functions do not affect

the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices.

Transposing the pitch in the MIXING CONSOLE display

You can also make detailed pitch settings (transpose, octave and tune) in the MIXING CONSOLE display called up

via [MIXER/EQ]  TAB [E ][F] TUNE.

Adjusting the Pitch in Octaves

Fine tuning the Pitch

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 38 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 39

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

Use the [PITCH BEND] wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or

down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The Pitch Bend is

applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). The [PITCH BEND]

wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released.

The maximum pitch bend range can be changed on the Mixing Console display:

[MIXER/EQ]  TAB [E][F] TUNE  [H] PITCH BEND RANGE.

Use the [MODULATION] wheel to apply modulation effects, such as vibrato, to

notes played on the keyboard. By default, this is applied to the keyboard parts

(RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). Moving the [MODULATION] wheel up (away from you)

increases the depth of the effect, while moving it down (toward you) decreases it.

You can set whether the effects caused by the [MODULATION] wheel will be

applied or not to each keyboard part independently: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E]

MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [ F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A]/[B] 2

MODULATION WHEEL.

Using the Wheels

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel

NOTE

• The effects produced by using the

[PITCH BEND] wheel may not be

applied to the LEFT part during Style

playback, depending on the Style

setting.

• (PSR-S970) The effects produced by

using the [PITCH BEND] wheel are

not applied to the Vocal Harmony

effect.

Using the Modulation Wheel

NOTE

Depending on the selected Voice, the

[MODULATION] wheel may control

volume, filter or some other parameter

instead of vibrato.

NOTE

To avoid accidentally applying modu-

lation, make sure the [MODULATION]

wheel is set at minimum (down) posi-

tion before you start playing.

NOTE

The effects produced by using the

[MODULATION] wheel may not be

applied to the LEFT part during Style

playback depending on the Style set-

ting.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 39 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

40 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can add dynamic variations to your performance intuitively in real time by assigning various functions such as

effects to the LIVE CONTROL [1] and [2] knobs.

1 Press the [ASSIGN] button to call up the LIVE CONTROL

display.

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to select

the desired combination of functions.

The selected number is indicated on the Main display (page 24).

Preset Functions

Using the LIVE CONTROL Knobs

NOTE

Pressing the [ASSIGN] button repeat-

edly or using the Data dial also lets

you select a combination of functions.

Knob 1 Knob 2

Voice/Filter/R1,R2

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter and the

resonance for the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts to change

the timbre or tone of the sound.

Voice/Effect/Rev/R1,R2

Adjusts the Reverb depth for the RIGHT 1 and 2

parts. Rotating the knob to the right makes it

deeper.

Voice/Balance/R1,R2

Adjusts the volume balance between the RIGHT 1

and 2 parts. Rotating the knob to the left increases

the RIGHT 1 volume, while rotating it to the right

increases the RIGHT 2 volume.

Voice/Effect/Cho/R1,R2

Adjusts the Chorus depth for the RIGHT 1 and 2

parts. Rotating the knob to the right makes it

deeper.

Voice/Attack/R1,R2

Adjusts the length of time until the RIGHT 1 and 2

parts reach their maximum level after the key is

played. Rotating the knob to the right increases it.

Voice/Release/R1,R2

Adjusts the length of time until the RIGHT 1 and 2

parts decay to silence after the key is released.

Rotating the knob to the right increases it.

Voic e/ A rp/ Ve l o ci t y

Adjusts the volume of Arpeggio. Rotating the knob

to the right increases it. For instructions on how to

use the Arpeggio function, refer to page 44.

Voice/Arp/GateTime

Adjusts the length of each note of Arpeggio. Rotat-

ing the knob to the right increases it.

Style/Retrig/OnOff,Rate

Turns on/off and adjusts the length of the Style

Retrigger function, which repeats a specific length

of the first part of the current Style (page 48).

Rotating the knob to the left-most turns the func-

tion off; rotating it to the right turns the function on

and decreases the length.

Chorus/Voice,Style

Adjusts the Chorus depth for all keyboard parts and

the Style. Rotating the knob to the right makes it

deeper.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 40 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 41

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

The eight function combinations can be edited on the PARAMETER ASSIGN

display called up by pressing the [I] (ASSIGN) button. For instructions, refer to

the Reference Manual on the website.

3 Rotate the LIVE CONTROL knobs to control the sound while

playing the keyboard or playing back the Style, etc.

Style/Track-Mute A

Turns on/off playback of the Style channels. Rotat-

ing the knob to the left-most position turns on only

the Rhythm 2 channel, and the other channels are

turned off. By rotating the knob clockwise from

that position, channels are turned on in the order of

Rhythm 1, Bass, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,

Phrase 2, and all channels are turned on when the

knob reaches to the right-most position. Turning

the channels on/off lets you easily change the

rhythmic feel. For details on the Style channels,

refer to page 56.

Balance/Style,M.Pad

Adjusts the volume balance between the Style and

Multi Pad (page 76) playback. Rotating the knob to

the left increases the Style volume, while rotating it

to the right increases the Multi Pad volume.

Filter/Voice,Style

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter and the

resonance for all keyboard parts and the Style to

change the timbre or tone of the sound.

Reverb/Voice,Style

Adjusts the Reverb depth for all keyboard parts and

the Style. Rotating the knob to the right makes it

deeper.

MIC(Gt)/Volume

Adjusts the volume of the microphone or guitar

sound input via the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.

Rotating the knob to the right increases it.

(PSR-S970) MIC/VH-Balance

Adjusts the volume balance between the sound

input from the microphone and the Vocal Harmony

effect. Rotating the knob to the left increases the

input volume, while rotating it to the right increases

the Vocal Harmony volume. For details on how to

use the Vocal Harmony function, refer to page 91.

(PSR-S770) AUX/Volume

Controls the input volume from the [AUX IN] jack

to adjust the volume balance with the other parts.

Rotating the knob to the right increases it.

Knob 1 Knob 2

NOTE

The Style Retrigger function is applied

only to the Main section of the Style.

NOTE

Depending on the panel settings or

how you move the knob, you may not

notice any change to the parameter

value, or the knob may not work prop-

erly, even if you rotate it.

NOTE

Pressing the [F] (RESET) button resets

the selected function’s parameter value

to the default, while pressing the [G]

(ALL RESET) button resets all parame-

ter values of the assignable functions.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 41 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

42 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can apply various effects to enhance or change the sound of the keyboard parts (LEFT, RIGHT 1 and 2). The

effects can be turned on or off by using the following buttons.

• HARMONY/ARPEGGIO

The Harmony or Arpeggio is applied to the right-hand Voices. Refer to “Applying

Harmony/Echo to Your Right-hand Melody” (see below) or “Triggering Arpeggios

with Your Right Hand” (page 44).

• TOUCH

This button turns the Touch Response of the keyboard on or off. When off, the same

volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.

•SUSTAIN

When this Sustain function is on, all notes played on the keyboard with right-hand

part (RIGHT 1 and 2) have a longer sustain.

•MONO

When this button is on, the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at

the time) with last note priority, letting you play single, lead sounds such as brass

instruments more realistically. Depending on the Voice, Portamento may be

produced when notes are played with legato.

When this button is off, the part’s Voice is played polyphonically.

• DSP/DSP VARI.

With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to

your music in a variety of ways — such as adding reverb that makes you sound like

you are playing in a concert hall.

The [DSP] button is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off

for the currently selected keyboard part.

The [DSP VARI.] button is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. For

example, this could be used to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary

speaker effect while you play.

Performance effects such as harmony (duet, trio, etc.), echo, tremolo and trill can be applied to notes played in the

right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard.

1 Turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button on.

2 Select the desired Harmony or Echo type.

2-1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [B] HARMONY/ARPEGGIO

2-2 Use the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons to select “Harmony” or “Echo.”

Applying Voice Effects

These effects only apply to the

selected part (the PART SELECT

button is on).

NOTE

You can change the Touch Response

type. For instructions, refer to the Ref-

erence Manual on the website.

NOTE

Portamento is a function that creates a

smooth transition in pitch from the

first note played on the keyboard to the

next.

NOTE

The DSP type can be changed. On the

Voice Selection display, select [5 ]

(VOICE SET)  TAB [E][F]

EFFECT/EQ  [A]/[B] 2 DSP. For

details, refer to the Reference Manual

on the website.

Applying Harmony/Echo to Your Right-hand Melody

NOTE

When you select another Voice, the

Harmony/Echo/Arpeggio type is auto-

matically set to the default which is

memorized as the Voice Set. For

details on the Voice Set function, refer

to the Reference Manual on the web-

site.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 42 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 43

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

2-3 Use the [4 ] – [6 ] buttons to select the desired type.

Pressing one of the [7 ] (DETAIL) buttons calls up the detail setting

display. For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

 Harmony Category

• Standard Duet — Strum

The Harmony effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of

the keyboard according to the chord specified in the chord or left-hand section

shown below.

• When the [ACMP] button is on and the LEFT part is off:

• When the [ACMP] button is off and the LEFT part is on:

• When both the [ACMP] button and the LEFT part are on:

•Multi Assign

The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on

the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the

keyboard parts [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the

Multi Assign effect. The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 Voices are alternately

assigned to the notes in the order you play.

2-2 2-3

NOTE

For details on the Split Point, refer to

page 58.

NOTE

The “1+5” and “Octave” settings are

not affected by the chord.

Chord section for Style playback

and Harmony effect

Split Point

LEFT Voice and chord section

for Harmony effect

Split Point

RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices

Chord section for Style

playback and Harmony

effect

Split Point

(STYLE)

LEFT Voice

Split Point

(LEFT)

RIGHT 1 and

2 Voices

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 43 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

44 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

 Echo Category (Echo, Tremolo, Trill)

The Echo, Tremolo or Trill effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand

section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the

[ACMP] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill works when

you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (or the last two

notes, if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately.

3 Play the keyboard.

The effect selected in step 2 is applied to the right-hand melody.

To turn off the effect, turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button off.

The Arpeggio function lets you play arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing the notes of the chord. For

example, you could play the notes C, E and G to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music

production as well as performance.

1 Turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button on.

2 Select the desired Arpeggio type.

2-1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [B] HARMONY/ARPEGGIO

2-2 Use the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons to select a category other than

“Harmony” and “Echo.”

2-3 Use the [4 ] – [6 ] buttons to select the desired type.

You can set the Arpeggio volume and select the part for playing the Arpeggio in

the display called up via the [7 ] (DETAIL) buttons. For details, refer to the

Reference Manual on the website.

3 Play a note or notes to trigger the Arpeggio.

The arpeggiated phrase differs depending on the notes played.

To turn off the effect, turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button off.

Triggering Arpeggios with Your Right Hand

NOTE

When you select another Voice, the

Harmony/Echo/Arpeggio type is auto-

matically set to the default which is

memorized as the Voice Set. For

details on the Voice Set function, refer

to the Reference Manual on the web-

site.

NOTE

By using the Arpeggio Quantize func-

tion, Arpeggio playback can be syn-

chronized with Song/Style playback,

allowing any slight imperfections in

the timing to be corrected. This can be

set in the display: [FUNCTION] 

TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY 

TAB [E][F] CONFIG 2.

2-2 2-3

NOTE

Arpeggio playback can be continued

even after the note has been released,

by assigning the Arpeggio Hold func-

tion to the footswitch. For instructions,

refer to page 97.

NOTE

You can control the Arpeggio volume

and the length of each note by using

the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For

instructions on how to assign the

functions to the knobs, refer to

page 40.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 44 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 45

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

You can create original Organ Flutes Voices by editing the preset Organ Flutes

Voices. Just as on a traditional organ, the original Voices can be created by

increasing and decreasing the levels of the flute footages. The created Voices can be

saved to internal memory (USER drive) or a USB flash drive for future recall.

1 Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button.

The FOOTAGE page of the Voice Set display of the last selected Organ Flutes

Voice is called up.

If you want to edit another preset Organ Flutes Voice, press the [I] (PRESETS)

button to call up the Organ Flutes Voice Selection display, and select as desired.

Then, press the [5 ] (VOICE SET) button to return to the Voice Set display.

2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the footage settings.

The footage settings determine the basic sound of the Organ Flutes.

The [1 ] buttons control two footages: 16’ and 5 1/3’. Pressing the [D]

button switches between these two footages.

If you want, you can select the Organ type and change other settings, such as

Rotary Speaker and Vibrato.

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices

NOTE

The term “footage” is a reference to the

sound generation of traditional pipe

organs, in which the sound is pro-

duced by pipes of different lengths (in

feet).

NOTE

Pressing the [D] button while holding

down one of the [1 ] buttons can

select both two footages, and lets you

set the same value for them by using

the Data dial.

For details on the VOLUME/ATTACK Page and EFFECT/EQ

Page, see the Reference Manual on the website.

[A]/[B] ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated.

SINE: Produces a clean, clear sound.

VINTAGE: Produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound.

EURO (PSR-S970 only): Produces the sound of the transistor electronic organ

equipped with the electronic tremolo.

[C] ROTARY SP

SPEED

Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary

speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (DSP TYPE parameter in the

EFFECT/EQ Page), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on.

[F]/[G] VIBRATO Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF.

[H] VIBRATO

DEPTH

Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels:

1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 45 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

46 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

3 Press the [I] (PRESETS) button to call up the Organ Flutes Voice

Selection display.

4 Save your Organ Flutes Voice by following the procedure on

page 28.

By installing Expansion Packs, you can add a variety of optional Voices and Styles to the “Expansion” folder in the

USER drive. The installed Voices and Styles can be selected via the [EXPANSION/USER] button in the VOICE or

STYLE category selection buttons, allowing you to expand your music performance and creation possibilities. You

can get high quality Expansion Pack data created by Yamaha, or create your own original Expansion Pack data by

using the “Yamaha Expansion Manager” software on your computer. For instructions on how to install the

Expansion Packs, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

For more information about Expansion Packs, access the following website:

http://www.yamaha.com/awk/

To obtain the Yamaha Expansion Manager software and its manuals, access the following website:

http://download.yamaha.com/

NOTE

To return to the Voice Set display,

press the [5 ] (VOICE SET) button.

NOTICE

The settings will be lost if you

select another Voice or turn the

power to the instrument off with-

out carrying out the Save opera-

tion.

Adding New Contents — Expansion Packs

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 46 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 47

Voices – Playing the keyboard –

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 1.

Selecting GM/XG or other Voices:

Voice Selection display  [8 ](UP)  [2 ] (P2)

Touch Response and effect-related settings

• Setting the Touch Response of the keyboard:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER 

TA B [ F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A] 1 TOUCH RESPONSE

• Making detailed settings for Harmony/Arpeg-

gio:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [B] HARMONY/ARPEG-

GIO  [7 ] (DETAIL)

Pitch-related settings

• Fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [E] MASTER TUNE/

SCALE TUNE  TAB [E] MASTER TUNE

•Scale Tuning:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [E] MASTER TUNE/

SCALE TUNE  TAB [F] SCALE TUNE

• Changing the part assignment of the TRANS-

POSE buttons:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER 

TA B [ F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [B] 3 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN

Editing parameters assigned to the LIVE CON-

TROL knobs:

[ASSIGN]



[I] (ASSIGN)

Editing Voices (Voice Set):

Voice Selection display





] MENU 1





] (VOICE

SET)

Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets

(effects, etc.):

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [F] VOICE SET FILTER

Editing Organ Flutes Voices:

[ORGAN FLUTES]  TAB [ E][F] VOLUME/ATTACK or

EFFECT/EQ

Installing Expansion Pack data:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ F] MENU 2  [F] PACK INSTALLA-

TION  [6 ] (INSTALL)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 47 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

48 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Styles

– Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

The instrument features various accompaniment and rhythmic

backing patterns (called “Styles”) in a variety of different musical

genres including pop, jazz, and many others. The Style features

Auto Accompaniment, letting you produce automatic accom-

paniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left

hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band

or orchestra

—

even if you’re playing by yourself.

1 Press one of the STYLE category selection buttons to call up

the Style Selection display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Style.

You can call up the other pages by pressing the buttons that correspond to the

page numbers (P1, P2 ...) or by pressing the same STYLE category selection

button several times.

3 Press the [ACMP] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment.

The specific left-hand section of the keyboard (page 58) becomes the chord

section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as

a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected Style.

Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment

NOTE

For a list of preset Styles of this instru-

ment, refer to the “Style List” in the

Data List on the website.

• Expansion Styles

Styles additionally installed (page 46).

• User Styles

Styles created with the Style Creator function

(refer to the Reference Manual on the website), or

Styles copied to the USER drive (page 30).

Preset Styles

NOTE

Although the chords will be detected

according to the notes you play in the

left hand section by default, you can

change the chord detection area from

the left hand section to the right hand

section. For details, refer to page 59.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 48 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 49

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

4 Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized start.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected

Style starts.

Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.

6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop Style playback.

The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Style name. There are various Style

characteristics; however, only the following ones are covered here. For information on others, refer to the Reference

Manual on the website.

• DJ Styles

These Styles can be selected from the category called up via the [DANCE] button.

These contain their own special chord progressions, so you can add chord changes to

your performance simply by changing the root key. The Multi Pad (page 76) data in

the “DJ Phrase” folder are specially created for these Styles. You can call up the

suitable Multi Pads by using the One Touch Setting function (page 53).

• Audio Styles (PSR-S970)

The audio Styles (+Audio) have been specially produced by adding audio recordings

of studio musicians playing in various recording studios worldwide. This adds all the

natural feel, ambience and warmth to the drums and percussion of the Style, giving

your performance greater expressive potential. Specifically, it retains the subtle

nuances and grooves that are difficult to reproduce using the preset drum/percussion

kit. Yamaha Time Stretch Technology allows the audio to follow your tempo

changes without changing pitch, so everything stays in perfect sync.

NOTE

• For information on chords and

Chord Fingering types, refer to

page 52.

• The chord specified in the chord

section is shown on the Main dis-

play (page 24).

NOTE

You can transpose the Style playback

(page 38).

NOTE

You can use the Style Retrigger func-

tion by assigning it to one of the LIVE

CONTROL knobs. For instructions,

refer to page 40.

Style Characteristics

160% of the default tempo

NOTE

You cannot specify the chord type,

such as major and minor, when using

the DJ Styles.

NOTE

• If the tempo is set to over 160% of

the default, the audio part is muted.

The maximum tempo (at which the

audio part can be played) is shown

in brackets at the upper right corner

of the Style name.

• Keep in mind that the audio Styles

may take more time to load than oth-

ers, and that they may have certain

restrictions and differ in the specific

functions that can be handled.

Style file compatibility

This instrument uses the SFF GE file format (page 8). This instrument can play back existing SFF files, but they will be

saved in the SFF GE format when the file is saved (or pasted) in this instrument. Please keep in mind that the saved file

can only be played back on instruments that are compatible with the SFF GE format.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 49 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

50 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

• [START/STOP] button

Starts playback of the rhythm part of the current Style. To stop playback, press the

button again.

• [ACMP] button

Turns the Auto Accompaniment on/off. When this button is on, both the rhythm part

and Auto Accompaniment can be played back when playing chords in the chord

section during Style playback.

• [SYNC START] button

This puts the Style playback in “standby.” The Style starts playing back when you

press any note on the keyboard (when [ACMP] is off) or you play a chord with your

left hand (when [ACMP] is on). While a Style is playing back, pressing this button

stops the Style and puts playback in standby.

• [SYNC STOP] button

Make sure that the [ACMP] button is on, then press the [SYNC STOP] button, and

play the keyboard. You can start and stop the Style anytime you want by simply

playing or releasing the keys in the chord section of the keyboard.

• INTRO [I] – [III] buttons

The instrument features three different Intro sections to add an introduction before

starting Style playback. After pressing one of the INTRO [I] – [III] buttons, start

playback of the Style. When the Intro finishes playing, Style playback automatically

shifts to the Main section.

• ENDING/rit. [I] – [III] buttons

The instrument features three different Ending sections to add an ending before

stopping Style playback. When you press one of the ENDING/rit. [I] – [III] buttons

while Style is playing back, the Style will automatically stop after the ending is

played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the

same ENDING/rit. button once again, while the ending is playing.

Operating Style Playback

To Start/Stop Playing

NOTE

When the Chord Fingering type

(page 52) is set to FULL KEYBOARD

or AI FULL KEYBOARD, Sync Stop

cannot be turned on.

NOTE

The INTRO [I] section consists of only

the Rhythm part while INTRO [II] and

[III] consist of all the parts as well as

the Rhythm part. When you play

INTRO [II] or [III], in order to have the

complete Intro section sound properly,

you need to play chords in the chord

section with the [ACMP] turned on.

NOTE

If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button

when the Style is playing, a fill-in

automatically plays before the END-

ING/rit [I].

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 50 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 51

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Each Style features four different Main sections, four Fill-in sections and a Break section. By using these sections

effectively, you can easily make your performance sound more dynamic and professional. The section can be freely

changed while the Style is playing back.

• MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons

Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Main

section (the button lights in red). Each is an accompaniment pattern of a few

measures and it plays indefinitely. Pressing the selected MAIN VARIATION button

again maintains the same section, but plays an appropriate fill-in pattern to spice up

the rhythm and break the repetition.

• [BREAK] button

This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment. Press the

[BREAK] button during Style playback. When the one-measure Break pattern

finishes playing, the Style playback automatically shifts to the Main section.

The TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons let you change the playback tempo of Style, Song and Metronome. The tempo of

the Style and Song can also be adjusted via the [TAP TEMPO] button.

• TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons

Press the TEMPO [-] or [+] button to call up the Tempo pop-up display. Use the

TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons to decrease or increase the tempo over a range of 5 – 500

beats per minute. Holding down either button can change the value continuously.

Pressing both TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously lets you call up the default

tempo of the last selected Style or Song.

• [TAP TEMPO] button

During playback of a Style or Song, you can change the tempo by tapping the [TAP

TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

When Style and Song are stopped, tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button (four times for

a 4/4 time signature) starts Style playback at the tempo you tapped.

Changing Pattern Variation (Sections) During Style Playback

Press the selected Main

section (lit in red) again.

The fill-in of the selected

Main section plays

(flashes in red).

AUTO FILL function

When the [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned on, pressing any of the

MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons as you play automatically plays

a fill-in section for a smooth, dynamic transition into the next (or same)

section.

About the lamp status of the section buttons (INTRO/MAIN VARIATION/BREAK/ENDING)

•Red: The section is currently selected.

• Red (flashing): The section will be played next, following the currently selected section.

* The MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons also flash red during fill-in playback.

• Green: The section contains data but is not currently selected.

• Off: The section contains no data and cannot be played.

Adjusting the Tempo

NOTE

If you want to adjust the tempo of an

Audio file, use the Time Stretch func-

tion on page 73.

In the case of audio Styles (page 49),

the maximum tempo at which the audio

part can be played is shown under the

current tempo.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 51 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

52 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

• [FADE IN/OUT] button

This produces smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting/stopping the playback of

a Style or Song. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button when playback is stopped and

press the [START/STOP] button for Style (or the [PLAY/PAUSE] button for Song)

to start playback with a fade in. To stop the playback with a fade out, press the

[FADE IN/OUT] button during playback.

By changing the Chord Fingering type, you can automatically produce appropriate accompaniment even if you

don’t press all of the notes which comprise a chord.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ E] MENU 1  [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING  TAB [F] CHORD FINGERING

2 Press the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons to select a Chord Fingering

type.

The following types can be selected, for example.

• SINGLE FINGER

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two or three

fingers.

•FINGERED

This lets you specify the chord by pressing the notes making up a chord in the left hand section of the keyboard

when [ACMP] is turned on or the LEFT part is turned on. For information on which notes to press for each chord,

use the Chord Tutor function (page 53) or refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

• AI FULL KEYBOARD

This lets you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands — like conventional playing of

a piano — and still have appropriate accompaniment. You don’t have to worry about specifying the chords.

(Depending on the song arrangement, AI Full Keyboard may not always produce appropriate accompaniment.)

For other types, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Fading In/Out

Changing the Chord Fingering Type

NOTE

When the chord detection area is set to

“UPPER” (page 59), only “FIN-

GERED*” is available. This type is

basically same as “FINGERED,” except

that “1+5,” “1+8” and Chord Cancel

are not available.

Major chord

Press the root key only.

Minor chord

Simultaneously press the

root key and a black key to

its left.

Seventh chord

Simultaneously press the

root key and a white key to

its left.

Minor seventh chord

Simultaneously press the root

key and both a white and

black key to its left.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 52 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 53

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

With this function shown in the right half of this display, you can see which notes to

press for specifying the chord. If you know a chord name but don’t know how to play

it, use this function. Although this function shows how to play a chord only in case

of “FINGERED,” the indication is useful also when a type other than “SINGLE

FINGER” is selected.

Use the [6 ] buttons to select the chord root then use the [7 ] – [8 ]

buttons to select the chord type. The notes you need to play are shown in the display.

One Touch Setting (OTS) is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically

calls up the most appropriate panel settings (Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently

selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided which

Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the

appropriate Voice for you.

1 Select a Style (steps 1 – 2 on page 48).

2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.

Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that

match the current Style, it also automatically turns on [ACMP] and [SYNC

START], so that you can immediately start playing the Style.

3 As soon as you play a chord in the chord section, the selected

Style starts.

Each Style has four One Touch Setting setups. Press other ONE TOUCH

SETTING [1] – [4] buttons to try out other setups.

Using the Chord Tutor Function

NOTE

Depending on the chord, some notes

may be omitted.

Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (One Touch Setting)

NOTE

For information on the panel settings

that are called up by One Touch Set-

ting, refer to the OTS section of

“Parameter Chart” in the Data List on

the website.

Confirming the One Touch Setting contents

In the Style Selection display, press the [6 ] (OTS INFO) button (when MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right

corner of the display) to call up the Information window that shows what Voices are assigned to the ONE

TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons for the current Style.

NOTE

If a Voice name is shown in gray, this indicates that the corresponding Voice part is turned off when pressing the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.

To close the window, press the [F] (CLOSE) button.

NOTE

You can memorize original settings to

One Touch Setting. For instructions,

refer to the Reference Manual on the

website.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 53 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

54 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can search for music pieces and songs that are most suitable for playing with the current Style by using the

Music Finder Records (page 80). You can automatically call up appropriate settings such as Voice, effect and pedal

by selecting the desired music piece.

1 Select the desired Style (steps 1 – 2 on page 48).

2 Press the [4 ] (REPERTOIRE) button.

The MUSIC FINDER display is automatically called up, and the music pieces

which can be played with the current Style are shown.

3 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired music

piece (Record).

The appropriate panel settings for playing the music piece are called up.

4 As soon as you play a chord in the chord section, the selected

Style starts.

Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link)

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change

when you select a different Main section (A – D). The Main sections A, B, C and D correspond to One Touch

Settings 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. To use the OTS Link function, turn the [OTS LINK] button on.

NOTE

You can change the timing in which the One Touch Settings change along with MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] changes. For instructions, refer to the Reference

Manual on the website.

Finding Suitable Music Pieces for the Current Style (Repertoire)

For optimum use of the Repertoire function, we recommend that you import Music Finder Records

(page 82).

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at

the bottom right corner of the display

(page 26).

NOTE

Depending on the particular selected

Style, there may not be any Records

called up.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 54 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 55

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

This convenient function “recommends” optimum Styles for your performance, based on the rhythm you play for

one or two measures.

1 In the Style selection display (page 48), press the [7 ]

(RECOMMEND) button to call up the STYLE RECOMMENDER

display.

The keyboard is divided at the B1 key into two sections as below.

The Drum instruments (Kick, Snare and Hi-Hat) are assigned to the left of the

B1 key while the Piano sound is assigned to the right.

2 Use the Style Recommender function to find the Style.

2-1 Press the [J] (START) button to start the metronome, indicating that the

Style Recommender function starts.

2-2 Use the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons or [TAP TEMPO] button to adjust the

tempo, and press the [E] (METRONOME) button to select the beat.

2-3 Play what you have in mind on the Piano section (ideally by using both

hands) or play the rhythm on the Drum section for one or two measures

along with the metronome.

The performance is analyzed over several seconds, then playback of the

most recommended Style starts. In addition, the candidates of the other

recommended Styles are listed in the display.

• Example 1: Play the following song on the Piano section.

The Styles that best match your performance having similar tempos are

listed.

• Example 2: Play the following rhythm on the Drum section.

The Styles that contain similar drum patterns are listed.

Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender)

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at

the bottom right corner of the display

(page 26).

Kick

Drum

Piano

Snare

Hi-Hat

NOTE

Pressing the [J] button toggles

between START and CANCEL.

NOTE

For better results, start playing from

the next measure when a song you

want to play starts from the middle of a

measure, or the song has a short

silence prior to the first note.

Kick

Snare

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 55 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

56 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

3 Select the desired Style from the list by using the [2 ] –

[7 ] buttons.

Try playing the keyboard along with the Style to see if it matches what you

want to play.

If the Style called up doesn’t match what you want to play, press the [J]

(RETRY) buttons, then return to step 2-3.

4 When you’ve found a Style you’re satisfied with, press one of

the [8 ] (OK) buttons to exit from the STYLE

RECOMMENDER display.

5 Play the keyboard along with the Style you just found.

Each Style contains the channels listed below. You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by

selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays.

Style channels

• RHY1, 2 (Rhythm 1, 2): These are the basic parts of the Style, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.

•BASS: The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the Style.

• CHD1, 2 (Chord 1, 2): These are rhythmic chord backing parts, commonly used with piano or guitar Voices.

•PAD: This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir, etc.

• PHR1, 2 (Phrase 1, 2): These parts are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the

accompaniment more interesting.

(PSR-S970)

•AUDIO: This is an audio part of the audio Style (page 49).

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button repeatedly if necessary to

call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF (STYLE) display which contains

the desired channel.

On the PSR-S970, there are two pages, 1/2 and 2/2 for Style channels. The

PSR-S770 has only one page.

2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to turn the channels on or off.

To listen to only one channel by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the

channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the

appropriate channel button again.

Turning On/Off Each Channel of the Style

NOTE

For information on the CHANNEL ON/

OFF (SONG) display, refer to page 65.

NOTE

You can save the settings here to Reg-

istration Memory (page 85).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 56 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 57

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the CHANNEL ON/OFF display.

You can adjust the volume balance between the parts (Song, Style, LEFT, RIGHT 1/2, etc.).

1 Press the [BAL.] button once or twice to call up the desired

page of the BALANCE display which contains the desired

channel.

There are two pages, 1/2 and 2/2.

2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the volume of the

desired parts.

In the BALANCE 1/2 page, you can adjust the volume balance between the

Song (page 62), Style, Multi Pad (page 76), microphone (or guitar) and

keyboard parts (LEFT, RIGHT1 and 2).

In the BALANCE 2/2 page, you can adjust the volume balance between the

Song (MIDI), Audio (page 71), sound input from the [AUX IN] jack, and all

keyboard parts (KBD). For information on the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons, refer

to page 74.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the BALANCE display.

To change the Voice for each channel

Press one of the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons corresponding to the desired channel to call up the Voice Selection display

(page 36), then select the desired Voice.

NOTE

The Audio channel does not have a Voice and, hence, cannot be changed.

NOTE

You can also turn Style channels on/

off for dynamic effect by using the LIVE

CONTROL knobs. For instructions on

how to assign the functions to the

knobs, refer to page 40.

Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Parts

NOTE

• You can also control the volume bal-

ance between the parts by using the

LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instruc-

tions on how to assign the functions

to the knobs, refer to page 40.

• On the VOL/VOICE page of the MIX-

ING CONSOLE display (page 95),

you can adjust the volume for the

Song and Style parts independently.

NOTE

When the UD-WL01 USB Wireless

LAN adaptor is connected to the

instrument, “WLAN” appears in the

BALANCE 2/2 page, and the volume of

the audio input via an iPhone/iPad

application tool (page 102) can also be

adjusted.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 57 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

58 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

The key which divides the keyboard into two sections is referred to as “Split Point.” There are two Split Points:

Split Point (LEFT) and Split Point (STYLE).

• Split Point (LEFT):

Divides the keyboard into the left-hand (LOWER) section and the right-hand

(UPPER) section.

• Split Point (STYLE):

Divides the left-hand (LOWER) section into the chord section and the LEFT Voice

section.

1 Call up the Split Point display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ E] MENU 1  [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING  TAB [E] SPLIT POINT

2 Set the Split Point.

Setting the Split Point

Chord section

Left-hand (LOWER) section

Split Point

(STYLE)

LEFT Voice

section

Right-hand (UPPER)

section

Split Point

(LEFT)

RIGHT 1, 2

Voices section

NOTE

You can also specify each Split Point

by note name, using the [3 ]–[6

] buttons.

[F] STYLE +

LEFT

Sets Split Point (STYLE) and Split Point (LEFT) to the same note. Press the [F] button

and rotate the Data dial. You can also specify the Split Point directly from the keyboard

by pressing the desired key on the keyboard while holding the [F] button.

[G] STYLE Sets each Split Point individually. Press one of the desired buttons and rotate the Data

dial. You can also specify the Split Point directly from the keyboard by pressing the

desired key on the keyboard while holding the appropriate button, [G] or [H].

NOTE

Split Point (LEFT) cannot be set lower than Split Point (STYLE).

[H] LEFT

Split Point

(STYLE + LEFT)

RIGHT 1, 2 Voices

(Right-hand) section

Chord + LEFT

Voice (Left-

hand) section

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 58 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 59

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

By changing the chord detection area from the left-hand section to the right-hand section, you can play a bass line

with your left hand while using your right hand to control Style playback.

1 Call up the Split Point display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ E] MENU 1  [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING  TAB [E] SPLIT POINT

2 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to set the CHORD DETECTION

AREA to “UPPER.”

With this setting, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section functions as the Chord

section as well as for melody performance. In this condition, note the following

points:

• In the right-hand (UPPER) section, you can specify the chord type as you play

the melody.

• When the Manual Bass function is turned on via the [E] button, the Voice for the

Bass part of the current Style is muted and assigned to the left-hand (LOWER)

section.

• The Chord Fingering setting (page 52) will be set to a specific type (“FIN-

GERED*”) automatically, in which case you should press three or more notes

simultaneously to specify the chord. Pressing two or less notes does not change

the chord type.

• Split Point (STYLE) is unavailable.

Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with

Your Left Hand

Split Point

(STYLE)

LEFT Voice section

(LOWER section)

Chord section

Split Point

(LEFT)

RIGHT 1, 2

Voices section

(UPPER section)

NOTE

This type is basically same as “FIN-

GERED,” except that “1+5,” “1+8” and

Chord Cancel are not available.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 59 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

60 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

The Style Creator function lets you create original Styles by recording rhythm patterns from the keyboard and using

already-recorded Style data. Basically, select a preset Style that is closest to the type you want to create, then record

the rhythm pattern, bass line, chord backing, or phrase (referred to as “Source Pattern” in the Style Creator) for each

channel of each Section.

This section gives you a brief introduction of the Style Creator function. For instructions on how to use the function,

refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Style Data Structure — Source Patterns

A Style is made up of the different Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each Section has eight separate

channels, each of which is referred to as “Source Pattern.” With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by

separately recording the Source Pattern for each channel, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

The Rhythm parts of a preset Style consist of a preset Drum Kit, and each drum

sound is assigned to a separate note. You may want to change the sound and the note

assignments, or make more detailed settings such as volume balance, effect, etc. By

using the Drum Setup function of the Style Creator, you can edit the Rhythm part of

a Style and save it as an original Style. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on

the website.

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator)

Phrase 2

Phrase 1

Pad

Chord 2

Chord 1

Bass

Rhythm 2

Rhythm 1

Audio Part

Recording or copying from another Style

(Only for PSR-S970)

Used as is when selecting an Audio Style as starting

data. This cannot be edited or deleted.

Main A

Main B

Fill In

Intro

Ending 2

Ending 3

Creating a Source Pattern

for each channel separately

Editing the Rhythm Part of a Style (Drum Setup)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 60 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 61

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 2.

Style playback related settings:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [G] STYLE SETTING

Memorizing original One Touch Settings:

[MEMORY] + ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4]

Creating/editing Styles (Style Creator):

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ F] MENU 2  [A] STYLE CREATOR

• Realtime Recording:

 TAB [E] BASIC

•Step Recording:

 TAB [F] EDIT  [G] STEP REC

• Style Assembly:

 TAB [E][F] ASSEMBLY

• Editing the rhythmic feel:

 TAB [E][F] GROOVE

• Editing data for each channel:

 TAB [E][F] CHANNEL

• Making Style File Format settings:

 TAB [E][F] PARAMETER

• Editing the rhythm part of a Style

(Drum Setup)

 TAB [E] BASIC  [G] DRUM SETUP

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 61 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

62 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Songs

– Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

For the PSR-S970/S770, “Song” refers to the MIDI songs which

include preset songs, commercially available MIDI format files,

etc. Not only can you play back a Song and listen to it, but you

can also play the keyboard along with Song playback and record

your own performance as a Song.

You can play back the following types of Songs.

• Preset Songs (in the PRESET tab of the Song Selection display)

• Your own recorded Songs (page 68)

• Commercially available Song data: SMF (Standard MIDI File)

If you want to play back a Song in USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive

containing Song data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand.

1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection

display.

2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location of the desired

Song.

3 Select the desired Song by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

NOTE

For instructions on playback and recording of audio files, refer to page 71.

Playback of Songs

NOTE

For information on compatible data

formats, refer to page 8.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 62 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 63

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

• Synchro Start .........While playback is stopped, hold down the SONG [J]

(STOP) button and press the [

F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

The [

F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button flashes, indicating the

standby status. You can start playback as soon as you play the

keyboard.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the SONG [

(STOP) button.

• Pause........................Press the [

F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button during playback.

Pressing it again resumes Song playback from the current

position.

• Rewind/Fast Forward

...............................Press the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) during playback or

while the Song is stopped. Pressing either of them once

moves back/forward one measure. Holding either of them

scrolls backward/forward continuously.

NOTE

You can transpose the Song playback

(page 38).

Queuing the next Song for playback

While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is convenient for chaining it to

the next Song smoothly during live performance. Select the Song you want to play next in the Song Selection

display, while a Song is playing back. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding

Song name. To cancel this setting, press the [7 ] (NEXT CANCEL) button.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26).

Playback-related Operations

NOTE

• You can adjust the volume balance

between the Song and keyboard

(page 57). On the VOL/VOICE page

of the Mixing Console display

(page 95), you can adjust the vol-

ume for each Song channel.

• You can also adjust the volume bal-

ance between the Song and Audio

(page 74).

NOTE

You can also turn specific part(s) on or

off (page 65).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 63 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

64 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Pressing the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button calls up a pop-up display showing

the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number).

While the Song Position pop-up is shown on the display, you can also use the Data

dial to adjust the value.

• Adjusting the Tempo

...............................Same procedure as with Style tempo. See page 51.

• Fading In/Out ..........Same procedure as with Style. See page 52.

You can view the music notation (score) of the selected Song.

1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 62).

2 Press the [SCORE] button to call up the SCORE display.

You can look through the entire notation by using the TAB [E][F] buttons

when the Song playback is stopped. As Song playback starts, the “ball” bounces

along through the score, indicating the current position.

You can change the displayed notation style by using the [1 ] – [8 ]

buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

NOTE

Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed

marker in certain Song data, which

indicates a specific location in the

Song.

For Songs containing Phrase Marks

You can change the unit for rewinding/fast-

forwarding by pressing the [D] (BAR) or the

[E] (PHRASE MARK) button.

For Songs not containing

Phrase Marks

Displaying Music Notation (Score)

NOTE

This instrument can display the music

notation of your recorded Song, or

commercially available MIDI files

(only those which allow devices to

indicate notation).

NOTE

The displayed notation is generated by

the instrument based on the Song

data. As a result, it may not be exactly

the same as commercially available

sheet music of the same song —

especially when displaying notation of

complicated passages or many short

notes.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 64 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 65

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

When the selected Song contains lyrics data, you can view it on the instrument’s display. Even if the Song does not

contain lyrics data, you can view the lyrics on the display by loading the text file (.txt file less than 60 KB) created

on a computer via USB flash drive. Text display allows for a variety of useful and convenient possibilities, such as

the showing of lyrics, chord charts, and performance notes.

1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 62).

2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to call up the LYRICS/TEXT

display.

You can switch between the LYRICS display and the TEXT display by using

the [1 ] buttons.

When the Song data contains lyrics data, the lyrics are shown on the LYRICS

display. You can look through the entire lyrics by using the TAB [E][F]

buttons when Song playback is stopped. As Song playback starts, the color of

the lyrics changes, indicating the current position.

To view the text file on the TEXT display, press one of the [5 ]/[6 ]

(TEXT FILES) buttons to call up the File Selection display and select the

desired file created on your computer.

For more information about the LYRICS (TEXT) display, refer to the Reference

Manual on the website.

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on

or off.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button several times to call up

the CHANNEL ON/OFF (SONG) display.

Displaying Lyrics/Text

NOTE

When the lyrics are garbled or unread-

able, you may need to change the Lyr-

ics Language setting: [FUNCTION] 

TAB [E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SET-

TING.

NOTE

(PSR-S970) The Lyrics (text) can be

displayed on an external monitor

(page 99).

NOTE

Information about Text File selection

can be memorized to the Registration

Memory (page 85).

NOTE

You can conveniently turn to the next/

previous text page by assigning the

function to the foot pedal: [FUNCTION]

 TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CON-

TROLLER  TAB [E] FOOT PEDAL

Turning Each Channel of the Song On/Off

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 65 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

66 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to turn each channel on or off.

If you want to play back only one particular channel (solo playback), press and

hold down one of the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired channel to

SOLO. Only the selected channel is turned on and others are off. To cancel solo

playback, press the same button again.

You can mute the right-hand part to try practicing that part on your own. The explanations here apply when you

practice the right-hand part with “Follow Lights” of the Guide functions. You can practice at your own pace —

since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly. In the SCORE display, you can see the note to

play and the current position.

1 Select a Song and call up the SCORE display (page 64).

2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.

3 Turn the [TR 1] button off to mute the right-hand part.

You can now play that part by yourself.

4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

Practice the muted part while viewing the SCORE display. The playback of the

left and extra parts will wait for you to play the notes correctly.

After your practice, turn the [GUIDE] button off.

NOTE

Usually, each part is recorded to the

following channels.

Channels 1 − 3: keyboard parts

(RIGHT 1, LEFT, RIGHT 2)

Channels 5 − 8: Multi Pad parts

Channels 9 − 16: Style parts

One-handed Practice with the Guide Function

NOTE

Usually, Ch 1 (right-hand part) is

assigned to [TR 1] button, Ch 2 (left-

hand part) is assigned to [TR 2] but-

ton, and Ch 3 − 16 are assigned to

[EXTRA TR] button.

Other Guide functions

In addition to the “Follow Lights” function explained above, there are more functions in the Guide features, for

practicing the timing of playing the keys (Any Key), for Karaoke or for practicing a song at your own pace (Your

Tempo).

[FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SETTING  TAB [E] GUIDE/CHANNEL  [A]/[B]

GUIDE MODE

For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 66 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 67

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song.

This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases.

To repeat a Song, turn the [REPEAT] button on and play back the desired Song.

Turning the [REPEAT] button off cancels Repeat playback.

1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 62).

2 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

3 Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated.

Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic

lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from Point A to Point B is

played back repeatedly.

4 To stop playback, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button.

The Song position returns to Point A and pressing the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/

PAUSE) button lets you start from that point again.

After you’ve finished practicing, press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat

playback.

Repeat Playback

NOTE

You can play multiple Songs repeatedly:

[FUNCTION]



TAB [

] MENU 1



[H] SONG SETTING



TAB [

] OTH-

ERS



[G] REPEAT MODE.

Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

NOTE

Specifying only Point A results in

repeat playback between Point A and

the end of the Song.

NOTE

When you want to repeat from the top

of the Song to the middle of the Song:

1 Press the [REPEAT] button, then

start Song playback.

2 Press the [REPEAT] button again at

the ending point (B).

ABTop of the Song End of the Song

Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped

1. Fast-forward the Song to Point A, then press the [REPEAT] button.

2. Fast-forward the Song to Point B, then press the [REPEAT] button again.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 67 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

68 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can record your performance and save it as a MIDI file (SMF format 0) to the

USER drive or USB flash drive. Since the recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit

your Songs.

Two recording methods are available:

• Quick Recording.....................see section below

You can record all parts of your performance at once or a specific part (right-

hand, left-hand or Style playback).

• Multi Track Recording...........page 69

You can record data to each channel one by one, to create a single, multi-part

Song. The channel/part assignments can be freely changed.

Before recording, make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection. With this recording, each part will be

recorded to the following channels.

• Keyboard parts: channels 1 – 3

• Multi Pad parts: channels 5 – 8

• Style parts: channels 9 – 16

1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button

simultaneously.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set, and the Song name on the Main

display (page 24) is set to “NewSong.”

2 Press the SONG [REC] button.

The [REC] and [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) buttons flashes, indicating the standby

status.

3 Start recording.

You can start recording by playing the keyboard, starting a Style, playing a

Multi Pad or pressing the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

4 After you finish your performance, press the SONG [J] (STOP)

button to stop recording.

A message may appear prompting you to save the recorded data. Press the

[EXIT] button to close the message.

Recording Your Performance

NOTE

For instructions on the recording of

audio songs (files), see page 74.

NOTE

Audio data such as the rhythm chan-

nels created via the audio data of audio

Style (page 49), Audio Link Multi Pad

(page 78) and audio files (page 71)

cannot be recorded to the MIDI Songs.

Quick Recording

NOTE

To cancel the recording, press the [J]

(STOP) button before going on to step

NOTE

You can use the metronome (page 37)

while recording; however, the metro-

nome sound will not be recorded.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 68 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 69

Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs –

5 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the

recorded performance.

6 Save the recorded performance as a Song.

6-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

6-2 Save the recorded data as a file by following the instructions on page 28.

You can create a Song consisting of 16 channels by recording your performance to each channel one by one. In recording

a piano piece, for example, you can record the right-hand part to channel 1 then record the left-hand part to channel 2,

allowing you to create a complete piece which may be difficult to play live with both hands together. To record a

performance with Style playback, for example, record the Style playback to channels 9 – 16, then record melodies to

channel 1 while listening to the already recorded Style playback.

Before recording, make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection.

1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button

simultaneously.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set, and the Song name on the Main

display (page 24) is set to “NewSong.”

2 While holding down the SONG [REC] button, press the

appropriate [1

] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired

channels to “REC.”

To cancel the REC status of the channel, press the desired channel button.

3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to change the part assignment for the

channel to be recorded.

NOTICE

The recorded Song will be lost if

you change to another Song or

you turn the power off without

carrying out the Save operation.

Recording a specific part

In place of step 2, pressing the SONG [TR1] (or [TR2]) button while holding the [REC] button enables you to

record only the right-hand (or left-hand) part.

Pressing the [EXTRA TR] button while holding the [REC] button enables recording of only Style and Multi Pad

playback.

Recording Each Channel Individually (Multi Track Recording)

NOTE

To cancel the recording, press the [J]

(STOP) button before going on to step

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 69 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

70 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

4 Start recording.

You can start recording by playing the keyboard, starting a Style, playing a

Multi Pad or pressing the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

5 After you finish your performance, press the SONG [J] (STOP)

button to stop recording.

A message may appear prompting you to save the recorded data. Press the

[EXIT] button to close the message.

6 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the

recorded performance.

7 Record your performance to another channel by repeating steps

2 to 6 above.

8 Save the recorded performance as a Song.

8-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

8-2 Save the recorded data as a file by following the instructions on page 28.

NOTE

The Style Retrigger function (page 40)

cannot be used when you are overdub-

bing to existing data.

NOTICE

The recorded Song will be lost if

you change to another Song or

you turn the power off without

carrying out the Save operation.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 3.

Editing Music Notation settings:

[SCORE]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons

Editing Lyrics/Text display settings:

[LYRICS/TEXT]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons

Using the Auto Accompaniment features with

Song Playback:

SONG [J] + [F/K]  [ACMP]  STYLE CONTROL [SYNC

START]  STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

Song Playback related parameters:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SETTING

• Keyboard and vocal practice using the Guide

function:

 TAB [E] GUIDE/CHANNEL

• Playing backing parts with the Performance

Assistant Technology:

 TAB [F] OTHERS  [6 ]/[7 ] P.A.T.

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator):

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ F] MENU 2  [B] SONG CREATOR

• Recording melodies (Step Recording):

 TAB [E][F] 1-16

• Recording chords (Step Recording):

 TAB [E][F] CHORD

• Selecting the setup parameters recorded to the

top position of the Song

 TAB [E][F] SETUP

• Re-recording a specific section — Punch In/

Out:

 TAB [E] REC MODE

• Editing channel events:

 TAB [E][F] CHANNEL

• Editing chord events, notes, System Exclusive

events and lyrics:

 TAB [E][F] CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 70 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 71

USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files –

USB Audio Player/Recorder

– Playing Back and Recording Audio Files –

The convenient USB Audio Player/Recorder function allows

you to play back audio files (WAV or MP3) saved to a USB flash

drive — directly from the instrument. Moreover, since you can

record your performances and recordings as audio files (WAV)

to a USB flash drive, it is possible to play back the files on

computer, share them with your friends, and record your own

CDs to enjoy as well.

You can play back audio files saved to the USB flash drive in the following formats.

• WAV ......44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo

• MP3 ......MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz sample rate, 64 – 320 kbps with

variable bit rate, mono/stereo

1 Connect the USB flash drive containing the audio files to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB

AUDIO PLAYER display.

3 Press the [H] (FILES) button to call up the Audio File Selection

display.

NOTE

For instructions on playback and recording of MIDI Songs, refer to page 62.

Playing Back Audio Files

NOTE

DRM (Digital Rights Management)

protected files cannot be played back.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

NOTE

While selecting the desired audio file

(WAV) in the Audio Link Multi Pad

function (step 5 on page 78), the [USB

AUDIO PLAYER] button does not func-

tion.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 71 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

72 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired file.

5 Press the [7 ] (AUDIO PLAY) button to start playback.

The display automatically returns to the USB AUDIO PLAYER display.

6 To stop playback, press the [2 ] (STOP) button.

NOTE

Audio files take a slightly longer time

to load than other files.

Viewing Audio file information

Pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button calls up the Information window which you can view the file name, path,

sample rate etc. of the selected red-framed file.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26).

To close the window, press the [F] (OK) button.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at

the bottom right corner of the display

(page 26).

NOTICE

Do not attempt to disconnect the

USB flash drive or turn the power

off during playback. Doing so

may corrupt the USB flash drive

data.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 72 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 73

USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files –

A-B Repeat Playback via the [C] (A B) button

The specified section (between the A and B points) can be played back repeatedly.

1. To set the A point, press the [C] button when playback reaches to the desired point.

The time set as the A point is shown in at “A [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the first wedge mark in

the playback progress bar.

2. To set the B point, press the [C] button again when playback reaches to the desired point.

The time set as the B point is shown in at “B [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the second wedge mark

in the playback progress bar.

The specified A-B section of the audio file will now play back repeatedly.

3. To cancel Repeat playback, press the [C] button again.

Playback-related Operations

[2 ] STOP Stops playback.

[3 ] PLAY/PAUSE Starts or pauses playback at the current position.

[4 ] PREV Pressing this selects the previous file; holding it moves continuously back through the cur-

rent file (in seconds).

[5 ] NEXT Pressing this selects the next file; holding it moves continuously forward through the cur-

rent file (in seconds).

[6 ] AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current audio file.

NOTE

The volume balance between the Song playback and audio file playback can be adjusted via the [BAL.] button. For

instructions, refer to page 74.

[7 ] TIME STRETCH Adjusts the playback speed by stretching/compressing the audio, compared to an original

speed of 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo.

NOTE

• The value can be adjusted from 70% to 160%.

• Time Stretch cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate.

[8 ] PITCH SHIFT Shifts the pitch between -12 and 12 in semitone steps.

NOTE

Pitch Shift cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate.

[I] VOCAL CANCEL Cancels or attenuates the center position of the stereo sound. This lets you sing “karaoke”

style with just instrumental backing, since the vocal sound is usually at the center of the ste-

reo image in most recordings.

Total playback timeElapsed playback time

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 73 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

74 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Repeat Playback mode via the [D] (REPEAT MODE) button

• Off .................... Plays through the selected file, then stops.

• Single................Plays through the selected file repeatedly.

• All.....................Continues playback through all the files in the current folder repeatedly.

• Random ...........Randomly and repeatedly plays back all files in the current folder.

You can record your performance as an audio file (WAV format — 44.1 kHz sample

rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) directly to a USB flash drive.

Sounds that can be recorded:

• Sounds that are generated via all the keyboard parts (LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2), Song

parts, Style parts, and Multi Pad parts.

• Sounds of a portable audio player that are input via the [AUX IN] jack.

• Sounds of a microphone or guitar that are input via the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT]

jack.

Maximum amount of recording time:

• 80 minutes per recording, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the

USB flash drive.

1 Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection and

the microphone connection (if you want to record your vocal).

Adjusting the Volume Balance Between Song and Audio Playback

Pressing the [BAL.] button once or twice calls up the BALANCE (2/2) display. In this display, you can adjust the

volume balance between the Song (MIDI) and Audio by using the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons. When this is set to

CENTER, the levels of the Song and Audio are equal. To instantly reset the balance to CENTER, press the [2 ] and

[3 ] (or [2 ] and [3 ]) buttons simultaneously.

NOTE

For more information on the BALANCE displays, refer to page 57.

Recording Your Performance as Audio

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

NOTE

If you want to record various parts sep-

arately or edit the data after recording

on this instrument, record as MIDI

files (page 68).

NOTE

Data that cannot be recorded includes:

Songs protected by copyright (such as

Preset Songs) and the metronome

sound.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 74 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 75

USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files –

3 Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB

AUDIO PLAYER display.

4 Use the [1 ] (REC) buttons to enter recording standby.

The [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the display flashes.

5 Start recording by using the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) buttons,

then start your performance.

The elapsed recording time is shown in the display while recording.

6 After you finish your performance, use the [2 ] (STOP)

buttons to stop recording.

Recorded data is automatically saved to the USB flash drive as a file with the

name automatically set.

7 Use the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) buttons to play back the

recorded performance.

To see the file of the recorded performance in the File Selection display, press

the [H] (FILES) button.

NOTE

The USB flash drive of “USB1” is

selected as the recording destination

when multiple USB flash drives are

connected.

NOTE

You can use the metronome (page 37)

while recording; however, the metro-

nome sound will not be recorded.

Recordable time

NOTICE

Do not attempt to disconnect the

USB flash drive or turn the power

off during recording. Doing so

may corrupt the USB flash drive

data or the recording data.

Elapsed recording time

NOTE

The recording operation continues,

even if you close the USB AUDIO

PLAYER display by pushing the [EXIT]

button. Press the [USB AUDIO

PLAYER] button to call up the USB

AUDIO PLAYER display again, then

stop the recording by pressing the [2

] (STOP) button.

NOTE

Keep in mind that if you make a mis-

take in your performance, you cannot

correct it by overwriting an existing

file. Delete the recorded file on the File

Selection display, then record your

performance again.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 75 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

76 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Multi Pads

– Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-

recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences adding impact and

variety to your keyboard performances.

Multi Pads are grouped in Banks of four each. The instrument

features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of different

musical genres.

Moreover, the Audio Link Multi Pad function allows you to

create a new pad with your audio data (WAV files) to play back

during your performance.

This section covers how to play back only Multi Pads. However, you can also play the Multi Pads during playback

of a Style/Song to make your performance more interesting.

1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the

Multi Pad Bank Selection display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired bank.

You can call up the other pages by pressing the buttons that correspond to the

page numbers (P1, P2 ...) or pressing the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT]

button repeatedly.

Press the [8 ] (UP) button to call up the next higher level folder to which the

Multi Pads are categorized.

3 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons to play a

Multi Pad phrase.

The corresponding phrase for the button starts playing back in its entirety at the

currently set tempo. You can play up to four Multi Pads at the same time.

Playing the Multi Pads

Shows the Multi Pad

category folders.

NOTE

There are two types of Multi Pad data.

Some types will play back once and

stop when they reach to the end. Oth-

ers will be played back repeatedly

(loop).

NOTE

Pressing the pad during its playback

will stop playing and begin playing

from the top again.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 76 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 77

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

4 Press the [STOP] button to stop playback of the Multi Pad(s).

If you want to stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button

and press the pad(s) you wish to stop.

When the [ACMP] or LEFT part is on, Multi Pad phrases automatically change the pitch to match the chord you

play in the chord section.

Play the chord in the chord section before/after pressing any of the Multi Pads.

You can start Multi Pad playback by playing the keyboard or by starting Style playback.

1 While holding the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button,

press the desired button or buttons from [1] – [4].

The corresponding buttons flash in red, indicating the standby status.

2 Start playback of the Multi Pad.

• When [ACMP] is off, press any note, or play back a Style.

• When [ACMP] is on, play a chord in the chord section, or play back a Style.

If you put a Multi Pad in standby during Style or Song playback, pressing any

note (when [ACMP] is off) or playing a chord in the chord section (when

[ACMP] is on) will start Multi Pad playback at the top of the next measure.

NOTE

• While the Style or Song is playing

back, pressing the Multi Pad button

starts playback at the top of the next

measure. When the Style or Song is

stopped, pressing the Multi Pad

button starts playback immediately.

• While the Style or Song is playing

back, pressing the STYLE CONTROL

[START/STOP] or SONG [J]

(STOP) button also stops playback

of the Multi Pad(s). While both the

Style and Song is playing back,

pressing the SONG [J] (STOP)

button stops playback of the Song,

Style and Multi Pad(s).

About the lamp status of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4]

buttons

• Green: Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data (phrase).

• Red: Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back.

•

Red (flashing):

Indicates that the corresponding pad is in standby (Synchro Start;

see below).

•

Off:

Indicates the corresponding pad contains no data and cannot be played.

Using Chord Match

NOTE

• Some Multi Pads are not affected by

Chord Match.

• The Multi Pads categorized in the

“DJ Phrase” folder are specially cre-

ated for DJ Styles (page 49), and

only the root key can be changed.

Chord Section

Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function

NOTE

To cancel the standby status of the

selected Pad, carry out the same oper-

ation, or simply press the [STOP] but-

ton to cancel the status of all Pads.

NOTE

When two or more Multi Pads are in

the standby status, pressing any one of

them starts simultaneous playback of

all of them.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 77 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

78 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can create a new Multi Pad by making links with audio files (WAV format: 44.1

kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution) in the USB flash drive to each of the Multi Pad.

The audio files (WAV) can be data you’ve recorded on this instrument (page 71) as

well as commercially available ones. Multi Pads to which audio files have been

linked are called Audio Link Multi Pads. The new Audio Link Multi Pads can be

saved to the USER drive or USB flash drive.

1 Connect the USB flash drive containing the audio files (WAV) to

the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the

Multi Pad Bank Selection display.

3 Press the [6 ] (AUDIO LINK) button to call up the AUDIO LINK

MULTI PAD display.

A confirmation message may appear here. If so, follow the on-display

instructions.

4 Select the desired Pad by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and

[G] buttons.

The WAVE File Selection display appears.

5 Select the desired audio file by using the [A] – [J] buttons.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD

display.

Creating a Multi Pad with Audio files (Audio Link Multi Pad)

NOTE

Audio Link Multi Pads can neither be

created nor played back during play-

back, recording standby or recording

of audio files.

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at

the bottom right corner of the display

(page 26).

NOTE

An audio file cannot be linked to a

MIDI Multi Pad.

NOTE

If an Audio Link Multi Pad has been

selected when you press the [6 ]

(AUDIO LINK) button in step 3, the

links made for the selected Pad appear.

In order to create a new Pad, make

sure to press the [C] (NEW BANK) but-

ton. Otherwise, you are simply re-

selecting the link in the selected Pad.

To confirm the information of the selected audio file

By pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button in the WAVE File Selection display, you

can confirm the information (title name, bit rate and sample rate, etc.). Press the

[F] (OK) button to close it.

To confirm the path of the selected audio file

By pressing the [H] (INFO) button in the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD display,

you can confirm the path. Press the [F] (OK) button to close it.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 78 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 79

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

7 If you want to link other audio files to other pads, repeat steps 4

to 6.

8 If desired, adjust the volume of each audio file by using the

[1 ] – [4 ] buttons.

By pressing the desired MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] button, you can

adjust the volume while playing the Multi Pad phrase.

9 Save the settings as a Multi Pad Bank.

9-1 Press the [I] (SAVE) button in the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD display to

call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display.

9-2 Save the settings as a bank file by following the instructions on page 28.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to check the new Audio Link Multi Pad in

the Multi Pad Bank Selection display.

The newly created Audio Link Multi Pad is marked with “Audio Link” at the

upper left of the file name.

If you want to change the Link setting:

Select the desired Audio Link Multi Pad, then carry out the same operations as

in steps 3 to 10.

You can play the Multi Pad to which the audio file is assigned by selecting them in

the USER or USB tab of the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. Although you can

play them via the same operations in page 76, note the following limitations.

• Make sure to connect the USB flash drive including the corresponding audio files

(WAV).

• Automatic repeat playback is not available.

• Only one Pad can be played back at once.

• Chord Match cannot be applied.

NOTICE

The setting will be lost if you

select another Audio Link Multi

Pad or turn the power to the

instrument off without carrying

out the Save operation.

Playing the Audio Link Multi Pads

NOTE

Audio files (WAV) take a slightly lon-

ger time than MIDI files to load.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 5.

Creating Multi Pads (Multi Pad Creator):

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ F] MENU 2  [C] MULTI PAD CRE-

ATO R

Editing Multi Pads:

Multi Pad Bank Selection display  [7 ] (EDIT)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 79 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

80 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Music Finder

– Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

This feature helps you call up the panel settings ideal for the

music you want to play simply by selecting a Music Finder

“Record,” which includes Voice and Style settings. If you want

to play a certain piece of music but don't know which Style and

Voice settings would be appropriate, you can search for relevant

Records by the title of the piece.

Moreover, by registering the Song, audio and Style file saved in

various locations into Music Finder, you can easily call up the

desired file from the corresponding Record.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER

display.

As necessary, select the tab by using the TAB [E][F] buttons.

• ALL........................All Music Finder Records

• FAVORITE ............Favorite Records you’ve added (for details, refer to the

Reference Manual on the website)

• SEARCH 1, 2 ........ Search result (page 81)

2 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired Record.

You can also use the Data dial and the [ENTER] button.

The panel settings in the Record are called up. When the Record including the

Style name is selected, the [ACMP] and [SYNC START] buttons are turned on

and the corresponding Style is called up. This lets you start Style playback

immediately.

Selecting the Desired Record (Panel Settings)

Each entry is called a “Record.”

This shows the song titles

(MUSIC) and information of

the Styles included.

Sorting the Records

Press the [F] (SORT BY) button repeatedly if necessary to change how the Records are sorted: by MUSIC (music

piece), STYLE, BEAT or TEMPO. Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to alternate the order, ascending or

descending.

When sorting the Records by MUSIC, you can use the [1 ] button to skip up or down through the Song

names alphabetically. When sorting the Records by STYLE, you can use the [4 ]/[5 ] button to skip up

or down through the Style names alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [] and [] buttons to move the

cursor to the first Record.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 80 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 81

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

3 Start playback of the Style by specifying the chords in the chord

section.

You can search the Records by specifying a song title or keyword, using the Search function of the Music Finder.

1 In the MUSIC FINDER display, press the [6 ] (SEARCH 1)

button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.

2 Enter the search criteria.

To avoid changing the tempo during Style playback when selecting another Record

Press the [I] (STYLE TEMPO) button to set the “STYLE TEMPO” to “HOLD” or “LOCK.” When set to

“LOCK,” the tempo will be locked while stopping as well as playing. If you want to reset the tempo every time

you select another Record, set to “RESET.”

Searching for Records (Panel Settings)

NOTE

If you want to input two or more key-

words, insert a comma between each

word.

NOTE

If you select a beat of 2/4 or 6/8, a

Style suitable for performing a song in

2/4 and 6/8 beat can be searched, but

the actual Style is created by using a 4/

4 beat.

NOTE

To cancel searching, press the [8 ]

(CANCEL) button.

[A] MUSIC Calls up the Character Entry window (page 32) to

enter the song title. To clear the entered title, press the

corresponding [F] (CLEAR) button.

[B] KEYWORD Calls up the Character Entry window (page 32) to

enter the keyword. To clear the entered keyword, press

the corresponding [G] (CLEAR) button.

[C] STYLE Calls up the Style Selection display (page 48). After

selecting the Style by the [A] – [J] buttons, press the

[EXIT] button to return to the SEARCH 1 display. To

clear the entered Style name, press the corresponding

[H] (CLEAR) button.

[D] BEAT Specifies the time signature for the search. All beat

settings are included in the search if you select ANY.

[E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location (the tab of the upper part of

the MUSIC FINDER display) for searching.

[1 ] ALL CLEAR Clears all entered search criteria.

[3 ] TEMPO FROM Sets the range of the tempo you want to use for the

search.

[4 ] TEMPO TO

[5 ]/

[6 ]

GENRE Selects the desired music genre.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 81 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

82 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

3 Press the [8 ] (START SEARCH) button to start the search.

After the Search is completed, the resulting Records appear in the SEARCH 1

tab of the MUSIC FINDER display. If no Records are listed, try steps 1 – 3

again with another song title or keyword.

4 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired Record.

5 Start playback of the Style by specifying the chords in the chord

section.

As a factory default, some sample Records are provided in the Music Finder. To use the Music Finder function more

conveniently and effectively, we recommend that you download the Records from the Yamaha website, and load

them to this instrument.

1 On the computer, access the following website and download

the Music Finder file (***.mfd) to the USB flash drive connected

to a computer.

http://download.yamaha.com/

2 Connect the USB flash drive which contains the Music Finder

file (***.mfd) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument.

3 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER

display.

4 Use the [7 ] (FILES) buttons to call up the File Selection

display.

5 Select the Music Finder file in the USB flash drive by pressing

the [A] – [J] buttons to call up a message prompting you to

select REPLACE or APPEND.

6 Press the [H] (APPEND) button if you want to add Records of

the selected Music Finder file, or press the [G] (REPLACE)

button if you want to replace all Records with the new ones.

NOTE

If you want to maintain the current

search results and start another

search, use the [6 ] (SEARCH 2)

button in step 1. (The current search

Records will remain in the SEARCH 1

tab.)

Downloading Records (Panel Settings) from the Website

NOTE

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure

to read “Connecting USB Devices” on

page 100.

The number of Records

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 82 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 83

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance –

7 When confirmation messages appear, follow the on-display

instructions.

You can confirm the Records that have been appended by checking the number

of Records in the right lower corner of the display.

By registering Song, audio or Style files in various locations (PRESET, USER and

USB) into Music Finder, you can easily call up your favorite files.

1 In the Song, Audio or Style Selection display, select the desired

file.

For instructions on Songs, refer to page 62; for audio, page 71; and for Styles,

page 48.

2 Press the [5 ] (ADD TO MF) button to call up the MUSIC

FINDER RECORD EDIT display.

3 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to register the file.

4 Check that the registered Record is shown in the MUSIC

FINDER display.

In the STYLE column of the Record, the Song is registered as “(SONG),” the

audio file as “(AUDIO)” and the Style is registered according to its Style name.

NOTE

Even after appending or replacing the

Music Finder Records, you can reset

them to their original factory settings

by selecting the “MusicFinderPreset”

file in PRESET tab of step 5.

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File to a Record

NOTE

• If you want to register files in the

USB flash drive, connect the USB

flash drive containing the data to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

• Before using a USB flash drive, be

sure to read “Connecting USB

Devices” on page 100.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at

the bottom right corner of the display

(page 26).

NOTE

For details on the MUSIC FINDER

RECORD EDIT display, refer to the Ref-

erence Manual on the website.

NOTE

To cancel the operation, press the [8

] (CANCEL) button.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 83 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

84 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can call up the registered Song, Audio or Style in the same way as done in the

sections “Selecting the Desired Record” (page 80) and “Searching for Records”

(page 81).

The selected file can be played back as follows.

• Song: Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button or play the keyboard. To

stop playback, press the SONG [

J] (STOP) button.

• Audio: Press the [J] (F PLAY) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. To stop

playback, press the [J] (

J STOP) button.

• Style: Specify the chords with your left hand and play the melody with your right

hand. To stop playback, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

Calling up the Song, Audio or Style registered to Music Finder

NOTE

If you want to play back a Song, audio

or Style file in the USB flash drive that

has been registered as a Record, make

sure to connect the same USB flash

drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] termi-

nal.

NOTE

When searching for Songs or audio

files (page 81), it is necessary to set

the search criteria as follows.

STYLE: Blank

BEAT: ANY

TEMPO: “---” - “---”

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 6.

Creating a set of favorite Records:

[MUSIC FINDER]  TAB [E][F] ALL, SEARCH 1 or

SEARCH 2  [H] ADD TO FAVORITE

Editing Records:

[MUSIC FINDER]  [8 ] (RECORD EDIT)

Saving the Record as a single file:

[MUSIC FINDER]  [7 ] (FILES)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 84 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 85

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Registration Memory

– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or

“register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory

button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by

simply pressing a single button. The registered settings for

eight Registration Memory buttons are saved as a single Bank

(file).

1 Make the desired panel settings, such as those for Voices,

Styles and Effects.

For information on the panel settings that can be registered with the

Registration Memory function, refer to the Registration section of the

“Parameter Chart” in the Data List on the website.

2 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY

section.

The display for selecting the groups to be registered appears.

3 Determine the groups you want to register.

Select the desired item by using the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons, then enter or

remove the checkmark by using the [4 ]/[5 ] (MARK ON)/[4 ]/[5 ]

(MARK OFF) buttons.

Registering Your Panel Setups

NOTE

You can also use the Data dial to select

items, and the [ENTER] button to enter

or remove checkmarks.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 85 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

86 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

4 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons to

which you wish to memorize the panel setup.

The memorized button becomes red, which indicates the number button

contains data and its number is selected.

5 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating

steps 1 – 4.

The registered panel setups can be recalled by simply pressing the desired

number button.

You can save all eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

call up the Registration Bank Selection Display.

2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file.

For instructions on saving, refer to page 28.

NOTICE

If you select the button whose

lamp is lit in red or green here,

the panel setup previously mem-

orized to the button will be

erased and replaced by the new

settings.

About the lamp status

• Red: Data registered and currently selected

• Green: Data registered but not currently selected

• Off: No data registered

NOTE

The panel setups registered in the

numbered buttons are maintained even

when you turn off the power. If you

want to delete all the eight current

panel setups, turn the power on while

holding the B5 key (right-most B key

on the keyboard).

Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file

Bank 01

Bank 02

Bank 03

Bank 04

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at

the bottom right corner of the display

(page 26).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 86 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 87

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

The saved Registration Memory Bank files can be recalled by using the REGIST

BANK [-]/[+] buttons or the following procedure.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select a Bank.

You can also use the REGIST BANK [-]/[+] buttons, or the Data dial and the

[ENTER] button to select a Bank.

3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) in the

Registration Memory section.

Recalling a Registered Panel Setup

NOTE

• When recalling the setups including

file selection of Song, Style, text,

etc. from a USB flash drive, make

sure that the appropriate USB flash

drive including the registered Song/

Style is connected into the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal.

• Before using a USB flash drive, be

sure to read “Connecting USB

Devices” on page 100.

NOTE

Turning the [FREEZE] button on lets

you disable recall of specific item(s) as

desired. For instructions, refer to the

Reference Manual on the website.

Confirming the Registration Memory Information

In the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, press the [6 ] (INFO)

button to call up the Information window, showing which Voices and Style are

memorized to the [1] – [8] buttons of a Registration Memory Bank.

NOTE

Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26).

NOTE

If a Voice name is shown in gray, this indicates that the corresponding Voice part is turned off when pressing

the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons.

To close the window, press the [F] (CLOSE) button.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 7.

Disabling recall of specific items (Freeze):

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [C] REGIST

SEQUENCE/FREEZE  TAB [F] FREEZE

Calling up Registration

Memory numbers in order (Registration

Sequence):

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [C] REGIST

SEQUENCE/FREEZE  TAB [E] REGISTRATION

SEQUENCE

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 87 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

88 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Microphone/Guitar Input

– Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument –

By connecting a microphone to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack,

you can enjoy singing along with your keyboard performance or

with Song playback. The instrument outputs your vocals through

the built-in speakers. Moreover, on the PSR-S970, you can

automatically apply various Vocal Harmony effects to your voice

as you sing, or you can use Synth Vocoder to graft the unique

characteristics of your voice onto synthesizer and other sounds.

You can also connect a guitar to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack,

and output the sound from the speakers of the PSR-S970/S770.

1 Before connecting a microphone or guitar, set the [GAIN] knob

to the minimum position.

2 Set the [MIC GUITAR] switch.

When connecting a microphone, set it to “MIC.” When connecting a guitar, set

it to “GUITAR.”

3 Connect the microphone or guitar to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT]

jack.

4 Turn on the power of the instrument.

Connecting a Microphone/Guitar

NOTE

Make sure to use a conventional

dynamic microphone.

NOTE

• When you are not using a micro-

phone/guitar, disconnect the cable

from the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.

• Always set the [GAIN] knob to mini-

mum when nothing is connected to

the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.

Since the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack

is highly sensitive, it may pick up

and produce noise even when noth-

ing is connected.

NOTE

When you use a guitar with active

pickups, set the [MIC GUITAR] switch

to “MIC,” since doing so can reduce

noise.

(standard 1/4”

phone plug)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 88 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 89

Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument –

5 (If necessary, turn on the microphone.) Adjust the [GAIN] knob

on the rear panel while singing into the microphone or playing

the guitar.

Adjust the [GAIN] knob so that the SIGNAL lamp lights in green. Make sure

that the lamp does not light in orange or red, since this indicates that the input

level is too high.

1 Connect the microphone/guitar to the instrument (page 88).

2 Press the [MIC SETTING/ VOCAL HARMONY] (PSR-S970) or

[MIC SETTING] (PSR-S770) button to call up the MIC/GUITAR

SETTING display.

3 Press the [A] (MIC/GUITAR) button to set it to ON.

This lets you hear the input sound from the instrument when you talk/sing into

the microphone or play the guitar.

4 If necessary, press the [C] (EFFECT TYPE) button to call up the

EFFECT page of the MIXING CONSOLE display and select the

effect type.

NOTE

You can also see the input level on the

MIC/GUITAR SETTING display called

up by the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HAR-

MONY] (PSR-S970) or [MIC SET-

TING] (PSR-S770) button.

Disconnecting the microphone/guitar

1. Set the [GAIN] knob to the minimum position.

2. Disconnect the microphone/guitar from the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.

Setting Up for Using a Microphone/Guitar

NOTE

Settings on the MIC/GUITAR SETTING

display (with the exception of the EQ/

CMP settings) can be memorized to

the Registration Memory (page 85).

NOTE

For the microphone/guitar sound, the

effect block should be set to DSP4. For

details on the MIXING CONSOLE dis-

play, refer to the Reference Manual on

the website, Chapter 9.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 89 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

90 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

(PSR-S970)

4-1 Press the [B] button, then use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the

effect category and use the [3 ]/[4 ] buttons to select the effect

type.

4-2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display.

(PSR-S770)

4-1 Use the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons to select the effect category then use the

[7 ]/[8 ] buttons to select the effect type.

4-2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display.

5 If necessary, press the [B] (EQ/CMP) button to call up the EQ/

CMP SETTING display and make the EQ and compressor

settings.

The appropriate settings for the use of microphone are provided by default.

When you use a guitar, make sure to change the settings for optimum sound.

The displays below are examples of recommended settings for microphone and

guitar.

Make sure to save the microphone or guitar settings you made here to the

internal memory via the [I] (USER MEMORY) button. Otherwise, the settings

are not maintained and you need to make the same setups every time you use a

microphone or a guitar.

For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

6 Sing into the microphone or play the guitar.

Adjust the volume balance between the microphone/guitar sound

and the instrument sound on the BALANCE display (page 57).

Turning the Talk function on by pressing the [F] (TALK) button in the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display lets you

instantly change the settings for talking. This is useful when you want to talk between songs during a performance.

You can also change the Talk settings to suit your preferences. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

NOTE

The microphone/guitar volume may

change depending on the selected

effect type.

NOTE

Pressing the [H] button lets you

instantly reset the settings for optimum

use of an electric guitar, as follows.

• [A] MIC/GUITAR: ON

• [F] TALK: OFF

•[4 ] HARMONY: OFF

•[5 ] VOCAL EFFECT: OFF

• [C] EFFECT TYPE: ASSIGN PART—

MIC/GUITAR, TYPE—MultiDistBa-

sic

Microphone settings (default settings) Guitar settings

NOTE

You can also adjust the microphone or

the guitar volume by using the LIVE

CONTROL knobs. For instructions on

how to assign the functions to the

knobs, refer to page 40.

Using the Talk function

NOTE

To get the most convenient use of this

function, you can assign a foot pedal

to turn the Talk function on/off during a

performance. For details, refer to the

Reference Manual on the website,

Chapter 10.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 90 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 91

Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument –

This section covers the Vocal Harmony Effects that can be applied to your voice via the microphone.

1 Connect the microphone to the instrument (page 88).

2 Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up

the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display.

3 Make sure that the [A] (MIC/GUITAR) button is set to ON.

4 Press the [E] (TYPE) button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type

Selection display.

5 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the VOCAL HARMONY tab.

6 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Vocal

Harmony type.

To call up the other display pages for further selections, press one of the [1 ] –

[5 ] buttons.

The Vocal Harmony features three different modes which can be selected

automatically by selecting a Vocal Harmony type.

Using Vocal Harmony (PSR-S970)

Icon Mode Descriptions

(Microphone and

man/woman)

Chordal The harmony notes are determined by the chords

you play in the chord section (with [ACMP]

turned on), the left hand section (with [ACMP]

turned off and [LEFT] turned on) or the chord

data of a Song.

(Microphone)

The harmony notes are determined in the same

way as in Microphone above. However, effects

such as Vocal Doubler and PokerPhaser are

applied. Harmony may or may not be applied

depending on the selected type. (If harmony is

not applied, the [4 ] (HARMONY) buttons

in the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display is set to

OFF.)

(Microphone and

keyboard)

Vocoder The microphone sound is output via the notes

you play on the keyboard or via the Song play-

back notes.

Vocoder

Mono

Same as the Vocoder mode basically. In this

mode, only single-note melodies or lines can be

played back (with last-note priority).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 91 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

92 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

7 Make sure that the [4 ] (HARMONY) buttons in the MIC/

GUITAR SETTING display is set to ON.

If necessary, use the [5 ] (VOCAL EFFECT) buttons to turn on the Vocal

Harmony effect which can be set on the display called up via the [8 ]

(EDIT) buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

8 Follow the steps below, depending on which type (and mode)

you selected.

If you selected one of the Chordal Types:

8-1 Turn the [ACMP] button on.

8-2 Play chords with your left hand, or play back the Song which contains

chord data.

Vocal harmonies based on the chords are applied to your singing.

If you selected one of the Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono Types:

8-1 Call up the SET UP window in the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display

by pressing the [8 ] button.

8-2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to change the keyboard setting (OFF,

UPPER, LOWER), if necessary.

Select UPPER to have the Vocoder effect applied by your right-hand-

played part, LOWER to have it applied by your left-hand-played part, or

OFF in order to not to have any Vocoder effect applied by your keyboard

playing. For more information on the keyboard setting for controlling the

Vocoder effect, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

8-3 Play melodies on the keyboard or play back a Song, and sing into the

microphone. You’ll notice that you don’t actually have to sing pitched

notes. The microphone sound is output via the notes or note you play on

the keyboard or Song playback.

NOTE

To return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING

display, press the [EXIT] button.

NOTE

You can adjust the volume balance

between the sound input from the

microphone and the Vocal Harmony

effect by using the LIVE CONTROL

knobs. For instructions on how to

assign the functions to the knobs, refer

to page 40.

NOTE

If you selected a Type having an “FX”

icon, your voice will be processed with

effects, but may not have harmonies

applied.

8-2

NOTE

For Vocoder Types, the effect is

applied to a maximum of three notes of

the chord you play; for Vocoder-Mono,

the effect is only applied to a single

note (last note played).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 92 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 93

Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument –

These are special effects that graft the characteristics of your voice input from the microphone onto synthesizer and

other sounds, for unusual machine‐like or robotic effects, as well as unique choir sounds, which you can control

with your own singing and playing.

1 Carry out steps 1 – 4 in “Using Vocal Harmony” on page 91.

2 From the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display, use the TAB

[][] buttons to select the SYNTH VOCODER tab.

3 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Synth

Vocoder type .

4 Make sure that the [4 ] (HARMONY) buttons in the MIC/

GUITAR SETTING display is set to ON.

If necessary, use the [5 ] (VOCAL EFFECT) buttons to turn on the Vocal

Harmony effect which can be set on the display called up via the [8 ]

(EDIT) buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

5 Try holding down a note on the keyboard and speak or sing into

the microphone.

Also, try changing notes as you say/sing different words, hitting a separate note

for each word.

Using Synth Vocoder (PSR-S970)

NOTE

To return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING

display, press the [EXIT] button.

NOTE

You can change the keyboard setting

(OFF/UPPER/LOWER), determining

which part of the keyboard (or Song)

controls the effect. See steps 8-1 and

8-2 on page 92.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 93 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

94 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 8.

Making the microphone/guitar settings:

(PSR-S970) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY], (PSR-

S770) [MIC SETTING]  [B] (EQ/CMP)

Saving the microphone/guitar settings:

(PSR-S970) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY], (PSR-

S770) [MIC SETTING]  [B] (EQ/CMP)  [H] (USER MEM-

ORY)  [6 ] (SAVE)

(PSR-S970) Setting up the Vocal Harmony Con-

trol parameters:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [E] (TYPE)  [8 ]

(SET UP)

(PSR-S970) Editing the Vocal Harmony Types:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [E] (TYPE)  TA B [ ]

VOCAL HARMONY  (select a Vocal Harmony type)  [8 ]

(EDIT)

• Editing the OVERVIEW tab parameters:

 TAB [] OVERVIEW

• Editing the PART tab parameters:

 TAB [][] PART

• Editing the DETAIL tab parameters:

 TAB [] DETAIL

(PSR-S970) Editing the Synth Vocoder Types:

[MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [E] (TYPE)  TAB

[][] SYNTH VOCODER  (select a Synth Vocoder type)

 [8 ] (EDIT)

• Editing the OVERVIEW tab parameters:

 TAB [] OVERVIEW

• Editing the DETAIL tab parameters:

 TAB [] DETAIL

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 94 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 95

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Mixing Console

– Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of

the keyboard parts and Style/Song channels, including volume

balance and the timbre of the sounds. It lets you adjust the levels

and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the optimum

balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are

applied.

1 Press the [MIXER/EQ] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE

display.

2 Press the [MIXER/EQ] button repeatedly to call up the MIXING

CONSOLE display for the relevant parts.

The part category (Panel, Style, Song) is indicated at the top of the display.

Basic Procedure

NOTE

For parts that have two pages, press-

ing the [A] (PART) button lets you

switch between the pages.

Entire Song part, entire Style part, Multi Pad part, Mic (or

Guitar) part, LEFT and RIGHT 1/2 parts

Page 1: Rhythm 1, 2, Bass, Chord 1, 2, Pad, Phrase 1, 2

Page 2 (only PSR-S970): Rhythm 1, 2, Audio

Page 1: Song channels 1 – 8

Page 2: Song channels 9 – 16

PANEL

STYLE

(1/2 or 2/2)

SONG (CH 1-8

or CH 9-16)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 95 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

96 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

3 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the desired page.

For details about each page, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

• VOL/VOICE ......Changes the Voice for each part and adjusts panning and vol-

ume for each part.

• FILTER..............Adjusts the Harmonic Content (resonance) and sound bright-

ness.

• TUNE ................Pitch-related settings (tuning, transpose, etc.).

• EFFECT............Selects the effect type and adjusts the depth for each part.

• EQ .....................Boosts/cuts the high band or low band for each part to correct

the tone or timbre of the sound.

• MEQ ..................Selects the master equalizer type applied to the entire sound

and edit the related parameters.

• CMP ..................This is the Master Compressor setting which determines the

dynamics of the overall sound.

4 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select a parameter, then use the

[1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the value for each part.

5 Save your Mixing Console settings.

NOTE

The MEQ and CMP settings are not

applied to audio playback or the met-

ronome sound.

NOTE

You can instantly set the same value

for the parameter to all of the parts, if

you simultaneously hold down one of

the [A] – [J] buttons and use the [1

] – [8 ] buttons (or the Data

dial).

• To save the PANEL display settings:

• To save the STYLE display settings:

Save them as Style data. If you want to recall the settings for future use, select the

Style file saved here.

1. Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [A] STYLE CREATOR

2. Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display.

3. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, then

save it (page 28).

• To save the SONG display settings:

First register the edited settings as part of the Song data, then save the Song. If

you want to recall the settings for future use, select the Song file saved here.

1. Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [B] SONG CREATOR

2. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the SETUP tab.

3. Use the [8 ] (APPLY) buttons to actually apply the settings.

4. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display, then

save it (page 28).

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 9.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 96 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 97

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Connections

– Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

This chapter covers the connectors of this instrument. To see where the connectors are located on the instrument,

refer to pages 14 – 15.

The FC4/FC4A or FC5 footswitches and the FC7 foot controller (sold separately) can be connected to one of the

FOOT PEDAL jacks. A footswitch can be used for switching functions on and off, while a foot controller controls

continuous parameters such as volume.

By default, each jack features the following function. Use the FC4/FC4A or FC5

footswitch.

• FOOT PEDAL [1] ..... Switches sustain on or off.

• FOOT PEDAL [2] ..... Controls the Super Articulation Voices (page 37).

You can also change the function assignments to the pedals as desired.

• Example: Controlling Song Start/Stop by footswitch

Connect a footswitch (FC4/FC4A or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks.

To assign the function to the connected pedal, select “SONG PLAY/PAUSE” in the

operation display: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER 

TAB [E] FOOT PEDAL.

CAUTION

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on

or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss

may occur.

Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL jacks)

NOTE

Do not connect or disconnect the

pedal when the power is on.

FC4/FC4A FC7FC5

Foot Pedals

NOTE

For details on functions that can be

assigned to the pedals, refer to the Ref-

erence Manual on the website.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10.

Assigning specific functions to each foot

pedal:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1 [D] CONTROLLER 

TA B [ E] FOOT PEDAL

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 97 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

98 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can connect a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound by using the

OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks.

You can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the

sound output to the external device.

You can connect the headphone jack of a portable audio player to the instrument’s

[AUX IN] jack, letting you hear the sound of that portable audio player through the

built-in speakers of the instrument.

The input signal from the [AUX IN] jack is affected by the setting of the

instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial, and the volume balance with other

sounds played on the keyboard can be adjusted from the BALANCE display

(page 57).

Connecting Audio Devices (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack)

NOTE

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs

having no (zero) resistance.

NOTE

Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connec-

tion with a monaural device.

NOTICE

To avoid possible damage, first

turn on the power to the instru-

ment, then to the external

device. When turning off the

power, first turn off the power to

the external device, then to the

instrument. Since this instru-

ment’s power may automatically

be turned off due to the Auto

Power Off function (page 17),

turn off the power to the external

device, or disable Auto Power

Off when you do not intend to

operate the instrument.

NOTICE

Do not route the output from the

OUTPUT jacks to the [AUX IN]

jack. If you make this connec-

tion, the signal input at the [AUX

IN] jack is output from the [OUT-

PUT] jacks and then back again,

creating a feedback loop that

could make normal performance

impossible, and may even dam-

age the equipment.

Using an External Stereo System for Playback

Audio signal

Phone plug

(standard)

Audio cable

Phone plug

(standard)

Input jack

Powered speaker

Playing a Portable Audio Player with the Built-in Speakers

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the devices,

first turn on the power to the

external device, then to the

instrument. When turning off the

power, first turn off the power to

the instrument, then to the exter-

nal device.

Phone plug

(stereo mini)

Audio cable

Phone plug

(stereo mini)

Headphone jack

Portable audio

player

Audio signal

NOTE

You can also adjust the input volume

by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs.

For instructions on how to assign the

functions to the knobs, refer to

page 40.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 98 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 99

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

By connecting an external monitor to the [RGB OUT] terminal of the instrument,

you can have the lyrics, text and display of the instrument’s LCD shown on the

monitor.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]



TAB [

] MENU 1



[J] UTILITY



TAB [

][

] CONFIG

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “1 SPEAKER/DISPLAY OUT.”

3 Press the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons to select the display contents.

When you select “LYRICS/TEXT,” the connected monitor shows the LYRICS

or TEXT display regardless of what is shown on the instrument’s LCD. When

you select “LCD,” the monitor shows the same contents as shown on the

instrument’s LCD.

You can connect a microphone or guitar to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack (standard 1/4” phone jack). For instruc-

tions, refer to page 88.

Connecting an External Monitor ([RGB OUT] terminal) (PSR-S970)

CAUTION

Avoid looking at the television or

video monitor for prolonged peri-

ods of time since doing so could

damage your eyesight. Take fre-

quent breaks and focus your eyes

on distant objects to avoid eye-

strain.

Mini D-Sub

15-pin

Selecting Display Contents for the External Monitor

NOTE

If the display is not aligned properly in

the external monitor, change the set-

tings on the monitor itself.

Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 99 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

100 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can connect a USB flash drive or a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal. This lets you save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive (page 28). You can also

connect the instrument to a smart device such as iPad via wireless LAN (page 102).

Connecting USB Devices ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal)

Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to

handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.

NOTE

For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

Compatible USB devices

• USB flash drive

• USB hub

• USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01; may not be

available depending on your area)

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please

visit the following web page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this

instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading

from the USB device may differ depending on the type of

data or the status of the instrument.

NOTE

The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/500mA. Do not

connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to

the instrument itself.

Connecting a USB device

When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the

device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper

direction.

NOTICE

• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device while executing

playback/recording and file management operations (such as

Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or when accessing the USB

device. Failure to observe this may result in “freezing” of the

operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the

data.

• When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice

versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two opera-

tions.

NOTE

• If you intend to connect two devices at the same time to a terminal, you should

use a bus-powered USB hub. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error mes-

sage appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instru-

ment, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub.

• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters.

Using a USB flash drive

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you

can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as

well as read data from the connected device.

Maximum number of USB flash drives

allowed

Up to two USB flash drives can be connected to the [USB

TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub.

The number of USB flash devices that can be used

simultaneously with musical instruments even when a

USB hub is used is a maximum of two.)

Formatting a USB flash drive

You should format the USB flash drive only with this

instrument (page 101). A USB flash drive formatted on

another device may not operate properly.

NOTICE

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make

sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain

important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting

multiple USB flash drives.

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB

flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB flash drive,

make sure to disable write-protect.

Turning off the instrument

When turning off the instrument, make sure that the

instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by

playback/recording or file management (such as during

Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do

so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 100 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 101

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

When a USB flash drive is connected, a message may appear prompting you to

format the USB flash drive. If so, carry out the format operation.

1 Connect a USB flash drive for formatting into the [USB TO

DEVICE].

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [F] USB

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the drive to be formatted from

the drive list.

The indications USB 1 and USB 2 will be displayed depending on the number

of the connected drives.

4 Press the [H] (FORMAT) button to format the USB flash drive.

5 Press the [G] (YES) button to actually carry out the Format

operation.

By pressing the [USB] button, you can access the files which are saved in the USB

flash drive.

Select the desired category by using the [A] – [C] and [F] – [H] buttons, then select

files by pressing one of the [A] – [J] buttons.

Formatting a USB Flash Drive

NOTICE

The format operation deletes any

previously existing data. Make

sure that the USB flash drive you

are formatting does not contain

important data. Proceed with

caution, especially when con-

necting multiple USB flash

drives.

NOTE

Playback of Style, Song and Multi

Pads will stop when formatting is

started.

NOTE

To cancel the Format operation, press

the [H] (NO) button.

Confirming the remaining memory

You can check the remaining memory of the connected USB flash drive by pressing the [F] (PROPERTY)

button.

Selecting Files in a USB Flash Drive

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 101 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

102 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

You can use a smart device, such as an iPhone or iPad, with the instrument for a

variety of musical purposes by connecting it to the instrument. By using application

tools on your smart device, you can take advantage of convenient functions and get

more enjoyment out of this instrument.

You can make connections by one of the following methods.

• Connect to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal via the USB wireless LAN adaptor

(UD-WL01, sold separately).

• Connect to the [USB TO HOST] terminal via the USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/

iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1, sold separately), etc.

• Connect to the MIDI terminals via the MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad

(i-MX1, sold separately).

*These accessories may not be available depending on your area.

For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” and the

Reference Manual on the website.

For information about the compatible smart devices and application tools, access the

following page:

http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data

between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. For details on using a computer

with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-related Operations” on the website.

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad ([USB TO DEVICE], [USB TO HOST]

and MIDI terminals)

NOTICE

Do not place your iPhone/iPad in

an unstable position. Doing so

may cause the device to fall and

result in damage.

NOTE

• Before using the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal, be sure to read “Precau-

tions when using the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal” on page 100.

• When you use the instrument along

with an application on your

iPhone/iPad, we recommend that

you first set “Airplane Mode” to

“ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on

your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid

noise caused by communication.

Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal)

NOTICE

Use an AB type USB cable of less

than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables

cannot be used.

NOTE

• When using a USB cable to con-

nect the instrument to your com-

puter, make the connection directly

without passing through a USB

hub.

• The instrument will begin trans-

mission a short time after the USB

connection is made.

• For information on setting up your

sequence software, refer to the

owner’s manual of the relevant soft-

ware.

USB cable

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 102 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 103

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Use the MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices (keyboard,

sequencer, etc.).

• MIDI IN....................Receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device.

• MIDI OUT ...............Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument to

another MIDI device.

For detailed information about MIDI settings such as transmit/receive channels on

the instrument, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.

Connecting External MIDI Devices (MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI transmit

MIDI receive

(playback)

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI device

NOTE

For a general overview of MIDI and

how you can effectively use it, refer to

“MIDI Basics,” which is downloadable

from the website.

Advanced Features

Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10.

MIDI settings:

[FUNCTION]  TA B [ E] MENU 1  [I] MIDI

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 103 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

104 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

– Making Global Settings and Using Advanced Features –

The Function menu provides a variety of convenient settings and

tools for the instrument. These include general settings that

affect the entire instrument, as well as detailed settings for

specific functions. Also included are advanced Creator features,

such as for Styles, Songs and Multi Pads.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  TAB [ E][F] MENU 1/MENU 2

2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to call up the desired function

page.

For information on what you can do on each page, refer to the Function List on

page 105.

3 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up desired page.

4 Change the settings or carry out the operation.

Refer to the Function List on page 105 to see where you can find detailed

information.

Basic Procedure

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 104 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 105

Other Functions – Making Global Settings and Using Advanced Features –

This list briefly explains what you can do in the displays which are called up via the [FUNCTION] button. For

more information, refer to the page and chapter references indicated below.

Function List

MENU 1 Description

Owner’s

Manual

Reference

Manual

SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING

SPLIT POINT Determines the Split Point. page 58 -

CHORD FINGERING Determines the Chord Fingering type. page 52 Chapter 2

B HARMONY/ARPEGGIO For selecting the Harmony type or the Arpeggio type. page 42 Chapter 1

REGIST SEQUENCE/

FREEZE

REGISTRATION

SEQUENCE

Determines the order for calling up Registration Memory settings when using

the TAB [E][F] buttons or the pedal.

- Chapter 7

FREEZE

Determines the setting groups (Voice, Style, etc.) that are to remain

unchanged even when you call up panel setups via Registration Memory.

- Chapter 7

D CONTROLLER

FOOT PEDAL Determines the functions assigned to the pedals. - Chapter 10

KEYBOARD/PANEL

For setting the Touch Response of the keyboard, or selecting the part(s) to be

affected by the [MODULATION] wheel or the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons.

page 39 Chapter 1

MASTER TUNE/SCALE

TUNE

MASTER TUNE For fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2 Hz steps. page 38 Chapter 1

SCALE TUNE

Determines the scale type and tuning of the pitch of the desired note (key) in

cents.

page 38 Chapter 1

F VOICE SET FILTER For disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.). - Chapter 1

G STYLE SETTING

For making Style playback related settings such as OTS Link timing,

Dynamics Control, etc.

- Chapter 2

H SONG SETTING

For making Song playback related settings such as Guide Function, Channel

settings, Repeat settings, etc.

- Chapter 3

I MIDI For making MIDI-related settings. - Chapter 11

J UTILITY

CONFIG 1

For making general settings such as Fade in/out time, metronome sound, Tap

Tempo sound, Auto Power Off.

page 17 Chapter 11

CONFIG 2 For making general settings such as speaker, display, etc. page 99 Chapter 11

PARAMETER LOCK

Determines the parameters (effect, Split Point, etc.) that are to remain

unchanged when the panel setups are changed via Registration Memory, One

Touch Setting, etc.

- Chapter 11

USB

Contains operations related to a connected USB flash drive, such as

formatting and confirmation of memory size.

page 101 Chapter 11

MENU 2 Description

Owner’s

Manual

Reference

Manual

A STYLE CREATOR

For creating a Style by editing the preset Style, or by recording Style channels

one by one.

- Chapter 2

B SONG CREATOR

For creating a Song by editing the recorded Song or by entering events one

by one.

- Chapter 3

C MULTI PAD CREATOR

For creating a Multi Pad by editing an existing preset Multi Pad, or by

recording a new one.

- Chapter 5

F PACK INSTALLATION

For installing Expansion Packs for adding extra contents downloaded from

the website or created on your own by using the Yamaha Expansion Manager.

- Chapter 1

G SYSTEM

OWNER For setting the Owner name, Message language, etc. page 18 Chapter 11

BACKUP/RESTORE

For backing up or restoring the settings and data saved in the USER drive of

the instrument.

page 34 -

SETUP FILES For saving and recalling the specified settings of the instrument. - Chapter 11

RESET For restoring instrument settings to their factory defaults. - Chapter 11

H WIRELESS LAN

For making settings for connecting the instrument to a smart device, such as

an iPad, via wireless LAN. This appears only when a USB wireless LAN

adaptor is connected.

- Chapter 10

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 105 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

106 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Direct Access Chart

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press one of the buttons (or move the appropriate knob, wheel or

pedal) listed below to call up the desired display.

Control Display called up with the Direct Access function

STYLE CONTROL

[ACMP]

FUNCTION

SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING CHORD FINGERING

[AUTO FILL IN]

[OTS LINK]

STYLE SETTING

[BREAK]

INTRO [I], [II], [III]

MAIN VARIATION [A], [B], [C], [D]

ENDING/rit. [I], [II], [III]

[SYNC START] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING SPLIT POINT

[SYNC STOP]

STYLE SETTING[START/STOP]

STYLE STYLE category selection buttons

SONG

[GUIDE]

FUNCTION SONG SETTING

GUIDE/CHANNEL

[SCORE]

OTHERS

[LYRICS/TEXT]

[TR 1], [TR 2], [EXTRA TR] GUIDE/CHANNEL

[REPEAT]

OTHERS

[H] (FF)

[G] (RW)

[F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE)

[J] (STOP)

[REC] GUIDE/CHANNEL

[SELECT] OTHERS

[TAP TEMPO]

FUNCTION

UTILITY CONFIG 1 TAP

TEMPO [+], [-] STYLE SETTING

[METRONOME]

UTILITY CONFIG 1

METRONOME

[FADE IN/OUT] FADE IN/OUT

TRANSPOSE [+], [-] FUNCTION CONTROLLER KEYBOARD/PANEL TRANSPOSE ASSIGN

UPPER OCTAVE [+], [-] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE

MULTI PAD

[SELECT]

MULTI PAD Selection display MULTIPAD EDIT[STOP]

[1], [2], [3], [4]

[DEMO] FUNCTION SYSTEM OWNER

[FUNCTION] FUNCTION MIDI

[MIXER/EQ]

MIXING CONSOLE VOL/VOICE[BAL.]

[CHANNEL ON/OFF]

[USB] FUNCTION UTILITY USB

[USB AUDIO PLAYER] AUDIO File Selection display (called up only when a USB flash drive is connected.)

TAB [E], [F] -

[ENTER] -

[EXIT] MAIN

Data dial -

VOICE

PART SELECT [LEFT]

FUNCTION

VOICE SET FILTER

LEFT

PART SELECT [RIGHT1] RIGHT1

PART SELECT [RIGHT2] RIGHT2

PART ON/OFF [LEFT] LEFT

ART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF [RIGHT2] RIGHT2

[LEFT HOLD] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING SPLIT POINT

VOICE category selection buttons FUNCTION VOICE SET FILTER

VOICE CONTROL

[HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ARPEGGIO

[TOUCH] FUNCTION CONTROLLER KEYBOARD/PANEL TOUCH RESPONSE

[SUSTAIN]

MIXING CONSOLE

EFFECT

[MONO] TUNE

[DSP] EFFECT

[VARI.] EFFECT Effect Type Selection display

[MUSIC FINDER] MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1

ONE TOUCH SETTING

[1], [2], [3], [4] OTS INFORMATION

(PSR-S970) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]

MIC/GUITAR SETTING EQ/CMP SETTING MIC/GUITAR

(PSR-S770) [MIC SETTING]

REGISTRATION

MEMORY

REGIST BANK [+], [-]

FUNCTION REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

[FREEZE] FREEZE

[MEMORY] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

[1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], [8] REGIST INFORMATION

FOOT PEDAL [1], [2] FUNCTION CONTROLLER FOOT PEDAL 1, 2

[MODULATION] FUNCTION CONTROLLER KEYBOARD/PANEL MODULATION WHEEL

[PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE

LIVE CONTROL [1], [2]

LIVE CONTROL PARAMETER ASSIGN

[ASSIGN]

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 106 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 107

Troubleshooting

Overall

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument.

The power is automatically turned off. This is normal and due to the Auto Power Off function. If necessary,

set the parameter of the Auto Power Off function (page 17).

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument

or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further

away from the instrument.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones

when using the instrument with an iPhone/iPad application.

When you use the instrument along with the application on your

iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON”

on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communica-

tion.

In the LCD, there are some specific points that are always lit or

unlit.

These are the result of defective pixels and occasionally occur in

TFT-LCDs; they do not indicate a problem in operation.

There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes

played on the keyboard.

This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sampling system.

Some Voices have a looping sound.

Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending

upon the Voice.

The overall volume is too low or no sound is heard. The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an appropriate

level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

All keyboard parts are set to off. Use the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1]/

[RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on.

The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the

volume in the BALANCE display (page 57).

Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (pages 56, 65).

Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug

the headphones.

Make sure that the Speaker setting is set to ON: [FUNCTION] 

TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] CONFIG 2

The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on, which mutes the sound. Press the

[FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off.

Depending on the function assigned to the LIVE CONTROL knob

or how you move the knob, you may not hear the sound properly.

Check the knob settings and reset the value (page 40).

The sound is distorted or noisy. The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant vol-

ume settings are appropriate.

This may be caused by certain effects or filter settings. Check the

effect or filter settings and change them accordingly, referring to

the Reference Manual.

Not all simultaneously played notes sound. You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 110)

of the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the

earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played

notes sound.

The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback vol-

ume.

The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Raise the

volume in the BALANCE display (page 57).

The Main display does not appear even when turning the power

on.

This may occur if a USB flash drive has been installed to the instru-

ment. Installation of some USB flash drives may result in a long

interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main

display. To avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the

device.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 107 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

108 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. The language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate

language for the file/folder name (page 18).

An existing file is not shown. The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed or deleted.

Manually rename the file, adding the appropriate extension, on a

computer.

Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be han-

dled by the instrument. Rename the file, reducing the number of

characters to 50 or less.

Voice

The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not

sound.

Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 35). If

necessary, press the appropriate PART ON/OFF button to turn the

part on.

A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The sound is

slightly different each time the keys are played.

The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and both parts

are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change

the Voice of one of the parts.

Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the

upper or lower registers.

This is normal. Some Voices have a pitch limit which, when

reached, causes this type of pitch shift.

Style

The Style does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is

pressed.

The Rhythm channel of the selected Style may not contain any

data. Turn the [ACMP] button on and play left-hand section on the

keyboard to sound the accompaniment part of the Style.

Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press

the [ACMP] button.

Make sure to play keys in the chord section of the keyboard (pages

58, 59).

The Track Mute function may have been assigned to the LIVE

CONTROL knob(s). Check the knob settings and reset the value

(page 40).

Styles in a USB flash drive cannot be selected. If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or greater), the

Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be han-

dled by the instrument.

Song

Songs cannot be selected. This may be because the language settings have been changed.

Set the appropriate language for the Song file name.

If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or greater), the

Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be han-

dled by the instrument.

Song playback does not start. The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to

the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) but-

ton.

In the case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied,

there are some restrictions and playback may not be possible. For

details, refer to page 27.

Song playback stops before the Song is finished. The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting”

for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn

off the Guide function.

The measure number is different from that of the score in the

Song Position display, shown by pressing the [G](REW)/

[H](FF) buttons.

This happens when playing back music data for which a specific,

fixed tempo is set.

When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on

for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 65).

The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed

correctly.

Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special

“free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, mea-

sure and music notation will not be displayed correctly.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 108 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 109

Troubleshooting

USB Audio Player/Recorder

A message indicating the USB flash drive is unavailable appears,

and the recording is aborted.

Make sure to use a compatible USB flash drive (page 100).

The USB flash drive may not have enough memory. Check the

recordable time on the display (page 75).

If you are using a USB flash drive to which data has already been

recorded, check first that no important data remains on the device,

then format it (page 101) and try recording again.

Audio files cannot be selected. The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The

compatible formats are: MP3 and WAV. DRM protected files cannot

be played back.

An existing recorded file is played back at a different volume

compared to when it was recorded.

The audio playback volume has been changed. Setting the volume

value to 100 plays back the file at the same volume as when it was

recorded (page 74).

Mixing Console

The sound seems strange or different than expected when

changing a rhythm Voice (Drum Kit, etc.) of the Style or Song

from the Mixer.

When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (Drum Kits, etc.) of

the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings

related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be

unable to restore the original sound. In the case of Song playback,

you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of

the Song and playing back from that point. In the case of Style

play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style

again.

Microphone/Vocal Harmony, Guitar

The microphone or guitar input signal cannot be recorded. The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song record-

ing. Use the USB Audio Player/Recorder function (page 74).

(PSR-S970) Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone

sound.

Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 91).

(PSR-S970) The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-of-

tune.

Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds,

such as the Style sound from the instrument. In particular, bass

sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony. To remedy

this:

• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.

• Use a unidirectional microphone.

• Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume

control (pages 18, 57).

Foot Pedal

The on/off setting of the footswitch connected to the FOOT

PEDAL jack is reversed.

Change the polarity settings: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1 

[D] CONTROLLER  [I] (PEDAL POLARITY).

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 109 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

110 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

Specifications

PSR-S970 PSR-S770

Product name Digital Keyboard Digital Keyboard

Size/Weight

Dimensions (W x D x H)

1,002 mm x 437 mm x 148 mm

(39-7/16” x 17-3/16” x 5-13/16”)

1,002 mm x 437 mm x 148 mm

(39-7/16” x 17-3/16” x 5-13/16”)

Weight 11.6 kg (25 lbs., 9 oz.) 11.1 kg (24 lbs., 8 oz.)

Control

Interface

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61 61

Type Organ Organ

Touch Response Hard 2, Hard 1, Medium, Soft 1, Soft 2 Hard 2, Hard 1, Medium, Soft 1, Soft 2

Other Controllers

Pitch Bend Wheel Yes Yes

Modulation Wheel Yes Yes

Knobs 2 (Assignable) 2 (Assignable)

Display

Type TFT Color Wide VGA LCD TFT Color Wide VGA LCD

Size 7 inch 7 inch

Language English, German, French, Spanish, Italian English, German, French, Spanish, Italian

Panel Language English English

Voices

Tone Generation

Tone Generation Technology

AWM Stereo Sampling AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony

Number of Polyphony (max.)

128 128

Preset

Number of Voices

989 Voices + 41 Drum/SFX Kits

+ 480 XG Voices

830 Voices + 36 Drum/SFX Kits

+ 480 XG Voices

Featured Voices

131 S.Art!, 30 MegaVoices, 31 Sweet!,

74 Cool!, 89 Live!, 30 Organ Flutes!

67 S.Art!, 23 MegaVoices, 27 Sweet!,

64 Cool!, 71 Live!, 20 Organ Flutes!

Compatibility XG, GS (for Song playback), GM, GM2 XG, GS (for Song playback), GM, GM2

Part Right 1, Right 2, Left Right 1, Right 2, Left

Effects

Reverb Block 52 Preset + 3 User 52 Preset + 3 User

Chorus Block 106 Preset + 3 User 106 Preset + 3 User

DSP Block 322 Preset (with VCM) + 10 User 295 Preset + 10 User

Master Compressor 5 Preset + 5 User 5 Preset + 5 User

Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User 5 Preset + 2 User

Part EQ 27 Parts 27 Parts

Mic/Guitar Effects Noise Gate, Compressor, 3Band EQ Noise Gate, Compressor, 3Band EQ

Vocal Harmony

Number of Presets

Vocal Harmony: 44

Synth Vocoder: 10

Number of User Settings

* The number is the total of Vocal

Harmony and Synth Vocoder

Vocal Effect 23 -

Styles

Preset

Number of Styles 450 360

Featured Styles

40 +Audio, 366 Pro, 31 Session,

10 DJ, 3 Free Play

322 Pro, 27 Session,

10 DJ, 1 Free Play

Fingering

Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On

Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On

Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Control

INTRO x 3, MAIN VARIATION x 4, FILL x 4,

BREAK, ENDING x 3

INTRO x 3, MAIN VARIATION x 4, FILL x 4,

BREAK, ENDING x 3

Other Features

Music Finder (Max.) 2,500 1,200

One Touch Setting (OTS) 4 for each Style 4 for each Style

Compatibility

Style File Format (SFF),

Style File Format GE (SFF GE)

Style File Format (SFF),

Style File Format GE (SFF GE)

Songs (MIDI)

Preset Number of Preset Songs 5 preset sample Songs 5 preset sample Songs

Recording

Number of Tracks 16 16

Data Capacity approx. 300 KB/Song approx. 300 KB/Song

Recording Function

Quick Recording, Multi Track Recording,

Step Recording

Quick Recording, Multi Track Recording,

Step Recording

Data Format

Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1), XF SMF (Format 0 & 1), XF

Recording SMF (Format 0) SMF (Format 0)

Multi Pads

Preset

Number of Multi Pad Banks

188 banks x 4 Pads 188 banks x 4 Pads

Audio Audio Link Yes Yes

Functions

Voices

Harmony Yes Yes

Arpeggio Yes Yes

Panel Sustain Yes Yes

Mono/Poly Yes Yes

Voice Information Yes Yes

Styles

Style Creator Yes Yes

Style Recommender Yes Yes

OTS Information Yes Yes

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 110 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 111

Specifications

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. Since Yamaha makes continuous improvements to the product, this manual may

not apply to the specifications of your particular product. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since

specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Functions

Songs

Song Creator Yes Yes

Score Display Function Yes Yes

Lyrics Display Function Yes Yes

Text Display Function Yes Yes

Wallpaper Customization Yes Yes

Guide

Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Your Tempo Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Your Tempo

Performance Assistant

Technology (P.A.T.)

Yes Yes

Multi Pads Multi Pad Creator Yes Yes

Registration

Memory

Number of Buttons

Control Registration Sequence, Freeze Registration Sequence, Freeze

USB Audio

Player/Recorder

Playback Format

.wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate,

16 bit resolution, stereo)

.mp3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz

sample rate, 64–320 kbps

and variable bit rate, mono/stereo)

.wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate,

16 bit resolution, stereo)

.mp3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz

sample rate, 64–320 kbps

and variable bit rate, mono/stereo)

Recording Format

.wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate,

16 bit resolution, stereo)

.wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate,

16 bit resolution, stereo)

Recording Time (max.) 80 minutes/Song 80 minutes/Song

Time Stretch Yes Yes

Pitch Shift Yes Yes

Vocal Cancel Yes Yes

Demonstration Yes Yes

Overall Controls

Metronome Yes Yes

Tempo 5 – 500 5 – 500

Transpose -12 – 0 – +12 -12 – 0 – +12

Tuning 414.8 – 440.0 – 466.8 Hz 414.8 – 440.0 – 466.8 Hz

Octave Button Yes Yes

Scale Type 9 types 9 types

Miscellaneous Direct Access Yes Yes

Expandability

(Expansion

Packs)

Expansion Voice Yes (approx. 512 MB max.) Yes (approx. 160 MB max.)

Expansion Style Yes (internal memory) Yes (internal memory)

Expansion Audio Style Yes (approx. 128 MB max.) -

Storage and

Connectivity

Storage

Internal Memory Yes (approx. 13 MB max.) Yes (approx. 13 MB max.)

External Drives USB flash drive USB flash drive

Connectivity

DC IN 16 V 16 V

Headphones Standard stereo phone jack Standard stereo phone jack

Microphone/Guitar Yes Yes

MIDI IN, OUT IN, OUT

AUX IN Stereo mini jack Stereo mini jack

OUTPUT L/L+R, R L/L+R, R

RGB OUT Yes -

FOOT PEDAL

1 (SUSTAIN), 2 (ARTICULATION 1),

Function assignable

1 (SUSTAIN), 2 (ARTICULATION 1),

Function assignable

USB TO DEVICE Yes Yes

USB TO HOST Yes Yes

Amplifiers/

Speakers

Amplifiers 15 W x 2 15 W x 2

Speakers 13 cm x 2 + 2.5 cm (dome) x 2 13 cm x 2 + 5 cm x 2

Power Supply

Power Supply Adaptor

PA-300C or an equivalent recommended

by Yamaha

PA-300C or an equivalent recommended

by Yamaha

Power Consumption 20 W 19 W

Auto Power Off Yes Yes

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Online Member Product Registration

•Music rest

•

AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha), power cord*

May not be included depending on your area.

Check with your Yamaha dealer.

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Online Member Product Registration

•Music rest

•

AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha), power cord*

May not be included depending on your area.

Check with your Yamaha dealer.

Separately Sold Accessories

(May not be available depending on your area.)

• AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha

•

Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150

• Footswitches: FC4/FC4A/FC5

• Foot controller: FC7

• USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod

touch/iPad: i-UX1

• MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/

iPad: i-MX1

• USB wireless LAN adaptor: UD-WL01

• USB-MIDI Interface: UX16

• Keyboard stand: L-6/L-7

(The exterior size of the PSR-S970/S770 is

beyond the limits as described in the L-6

Assembly Instructions. However, we have

determined through tests that the stand can be

safely used for the instrument.)

• AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha

•

Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150

• Footswitches: FC4/FC4A/FC5

• Foot controller: FC7

• USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod

touch/iPad: i-UX1

• MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/

iPad: i-MX1

• USB wireless LAN adaptor: UD-WL01

• USB-MIDI Interface: UX16

• Keyboard stand: L-6/L-7

(The exterior size of the PSR-S970/S770 is

beyond the limits as described in the L-6

Assembly Instructions. However, we have

determined through tests that the stand can be

safely used for the instrument.)

PSR-S970 PSR-S770

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 111 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

112 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual

A-B Repeat................................67, 73

AC adaptor..............................16

, 111

Accompaniment ..............................48

Arpeggio ...................................44

, 47

Audio Link Multi Pad .......................78

Audio Player ....................................71

Audio Recorder ...............................74

Audio Style ...................................... 49

Auto Fill............................................51

Auto Power Off ................................ 17

AUX IN.............................................98

Backup ............................................34

Balance .....................................57

, 74

Break (Style)....................................51

Channel (Song) ...............................65

Channel (Style)................................56

Character entry ...............................32

Chord detection area ......................59

Chord Fingering type ...................... 52

Chord Match ...................................77

Chord Tutor ..................................... 53

Chordal............................................91

CMP (Master Compressor) .............96

Computer ......................................102

Computer-related Operations ...........7

Connection ......................................97

Copy................................................30

Data dial ..........................................22

Data List ............................................7

Delete ..............................................31

Demo...............................................19

Direct Access..........................23

, 106

DJ Style ...........................................49

Drum Kit .......................................... 37

Drum Setup..................................... 60

DSP ................................................. 42

Echo................................................ 42

Effect......................................... 42

, 96

Ending (Style) ................................. 50

EQ (Equalizer)................................. 96

Expansion Pack ........................ 46

, 47

Factory Reset.................................. 33

Fade In/Out ..................................... 52

Fast Forward .............................63

, 73

File ............................................ 26

, 27

File Selection display ...................... 26

Fill-in................................................ 51

Filter ................................................ 96

Fingering type ................................. 52

Folder.............................................. 29

Foot controller ................................. 97

Footage........................................... 45

Footswitch....................................... 97

Format (Compatibility) ...................... 8

Format (USB flash drive)............... 101

Freeze ............................................. 87

Function ........................................ 104

GM .............................................. 8, 47

GS ..................................................... 8

Guide .............................................. 66

Guitar .............................................. 88

Harmony ................................... 42, 47

Headphones ................................... 15

Intro (Style) ..................................... 50

iPhone/iPad................................... 102

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual ...... 7

Keyboard part................................. 35

Knob ............................................... 40

Language ....................................... 18

Layer............................................... 35

Left Hold ......................................... 37

LEFT part ........................................ 35

LIVE CONTROL knob ..................... 40

LOWER ........................................... 59

Lyrics .............................................. 65

Main (Style)..................................... 51

Main display ................................... 24

Master Compressor (CMP)............. 96

Master EQ (MEQ) ........................... 96

Master Tune.................................... 38

MegaVoice...................................... 37

MENU ..................................... 26

, 105

MEQ (Master EQ) ........................... 96

Metronome...................................... 37

Microphone..................................... 88

MIDI .............................................. 103

Mixing Console (Mixer)................... 95

Modulation wheel............................ 39

Monitor............................................ 99

Mono............................................... 42

Move ............................................... 30

MP3................................................. 71

Multi Pad......................................... 76

Multi Pad Creator............................ 79

Multi Track Recording .................... 69

Music Finder ................................... 80

Index

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 112 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 113

Index

Music notation .................................64

Music rest........................................14

Name...............................................30

One Touch Setting (OTS) ................53

Organ Flutes Voice..........................45

OTS (One Touch Setting) ................53

OTS Link..........................................54

P.A.T. (Performance Assistant

Technology) ....................................70

Parameter Lock .............................105

Part (Voice)......................................35

Part EQ ............................................96

Pause ........................................63

, 73

Pedal .......................................97

, 105

Performance Assistant Technology

(P.A.T.) ............................................70

Phrase Mark .................................... 64

Pitch ................................... 38

, 73, 96

Pitch Bend wheel ............................39

Pitch Shift ........................................73

Playback (Audio File) ......................71

Playback (Song)..............................62

Playback (Style) ..............................48

Power ..............................................16

PRESET (File Selection display)......26

Protected Song ...............................27

Quick Recording ............................. 68

Record (Music Finder) ....................80

Recording (Audio)...........................74

Recording (Song)............................68

Reference Manual .............................7

Registration Memory .......................85

Registration Sequence....................87

Repeat................................ 67

, 73, 74

Repertoire........................................54

Reset ............................................... 33

Rewind ......................................63

, 73

RGB OUT ........................................ 99

RIGHT part...................................... 35

S.Art! (Super Articulation Voice) ..... 37

Save ................................................ 28

Scale Tune ...................................... 38

Score............................................... 64

Section ............................................ 51

SFF (Style File Format) ................ 8

, 49

SFX Kit ............................................ 37

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ............... 62

Song................................................ 62

Song Creator................................... 70

Speaker...................................98

, 105

Specifications ............................... 110

Split ................................................. 35

Split Point ........................................ 58

Standard MIDI File (SMF) ............... 62

Step Recording (Song) ................... 70

Step Recording (Style).................... 61

Style ................................................ 48

Style Creator ................................... 60

Style File Format (SFF) ................ 8

, 49

Style Recommender ....................... 55

Style Retrigger ................................ 40

Super Articulation Voice ................. 37

Sustain ............................................ 42

Synchro Start (Multi Pad) ................ 77

Synchro Start (Song)....................... 63

Synchro Start (Style) ....................... 50

Synchro Stop .................................. 50

Synth Vocoder ................................ 93

Talk ................................................. 90

Tap Tempo...................................... 51

Tempo....................................... 51

, 73

Text ................................................. 65

Time Stretch.................................... 73

Touch Response....................... 42

, 47

Transpose ................................. 38

, 96

Troubleshooting ............................ 107

Tuning .......................................38

, 96

UPPER ............................................ 59

Upper Octave ................................. 38

USB (File Selection display) ........... 26

USB Audio Player/Recorder ........... 71

USB flash drive ..................... 100

, 101

USB wireless LAN adaptor ... 100

, 102

USER (File Selection display) ......... 26

Vocal Cancel .................................. 73

Vocal Harmony ............................... 91

Vocoder .......................................... 91

Vocoder Mono ................................ 91

Voice............................................... 35

Voice Set......................................... 47

Volume (Audio) ............................... 73

Volume (Master volume)................. 18

Volume Balance........................ 57

, 74

WAV .......................................... 71, 78

Wireless LAN ........................ 102

, 105

XF...................................................... 8

XG............................................... 8

, 47

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 113 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også

selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not

be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your

national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human

health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or

the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask

for the correct method of disposal.

(weee_eu_en_01)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in

your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

(2 wires)

Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques.

Le symbole sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent

pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels.

Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les

déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC.

En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de

précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d'un traitement

inapproprié des déchets.

Pour plus d'informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter

votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits.

[Pour les professionnels dans l'Union Européenne]

Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou

fournisseur pour plus d'informations.

[Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de l'Union Européenne]

Ce symbole est seulement valable dans l'Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et

électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée.

(weee_eu_fr_01)

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 114 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 115 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

1-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

ON ARRANGER WORKSTATION KEYBOARDS

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and

every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer

you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from

Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in

the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized

Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor

or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will

pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not

cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation

or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be

presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any

unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic

maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature

or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f)

RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if

applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This

warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful,

contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product

to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to

whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or

check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied

by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or

other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted

for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only

if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO

THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha

Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha.

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 116 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha

ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más

cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”,

Col. San Jose Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juarez,

03900, Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –

Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 54-11-4119-7000

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Venezuela

C.C. Manzanares Plaza P4

Ofic. 0401- Manzanares-Baruta

Caracas Venezuela

Tel: 58-212-943-1877

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso No.7, Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 044-387-8080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office)

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/

ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Poland Office

ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: +48 22 88 00 888

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: 02-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida

MSD06

Tel: 02133-2144

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activites Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

J. A. Wettergrensgata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46 31 89 34 00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial

Denmark

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1361 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 78 00

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik,

Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sokak No:5 Spring Giz Plaza

Bağımsız Böl. No:3, 34398 Şişli, İstanbul

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

SOUTH AFRICA

Global Music Instruments

World of Yamaha

19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate Ext.6, Sandton,

South Africa

Tel: +27-11-259-7700

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector

47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: 65-6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd.

2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.

New Taipei City 22063 Taiwan

Tel: 02-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

http://asia.yamaha.com

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

http://asia.yamaha.com

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI10

HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

12psrs970_en_om.book Page 117 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

ZP52790

Manual Development Department

Published 07/2015 POZC*.*-**B0

Printed in Indonesia

Documenttranscriptie

English Français Digital Workstation Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel Owner’s Manual Mode d'emploi Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Workstation! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5 – 6. Merci d'avoir choisi ce Clavier Arrangeur Professionnel Yamaha ! Nous vous conseillons de lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi afin de tirer pleinement profit des fonctions avancées et très utiles de votre instrument. Nous vous recommandons également de garder ce manuel à portée de main pour toute référence ultérieure. Avant d'utiliser l'instrument, lisez attentivement la section « PRÉCAUTIONS D'USAGE » aux pages 5 et 6. EN FR 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 2 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM For PSR-S970/PSR-S770 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) 2 Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 3 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM For PSR-S970/PSR-S770 COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Address : Telephone : Type of Equipment : Model Name : Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 714-522-9011 Digital Keyboard PSR-S970/S770 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and PSR-S970/PSR-S770 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 3 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 4 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (fcc_sengen) CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (can_b_01) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 5 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For PSR-S970/PSR-S770 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 111) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. DMI-5 1/2 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 5 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 6 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not place objects in front of the instrument's air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. DMI-5 2/2 NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling  Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.  Saving data • The edited Songs/Styles/Voices/Multi Pads and MIDI settings are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. This also occurs when the power is turned off by the Auto Power Off function (page 17). Save the edited data to the instrument, or to a USB flash drive (page 28). However, the data saved to the instrument may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto a USB flash drive. For information about the handling of USB flash drive, refer to page 100. • To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto spare USB flash drive or an external device such as a computer as backup data. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) 6 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 7 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Online Member Product Registration The “PRODUCT ID” on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. • Music rest • AC adaptor, power cord May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. Included Accessories About the Manuals This instrument has the following document and instructional materials.  Included Document Owner’s Manual (this book) Provides overall explanations of the PSR-S970/S770 basic functions.  Online Materials (PDF) Reference Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Explains advanced features of the instrument, not explained in the Owner’s Manual. For example, you can learn how to create original Styles, Songs or Multi Pads, or find detailed explanations of specific parameters. Data List Contains various preset content lists such as Voices, Styles, Effects, as well as MIDI-related information. Computer-related Operations Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transmitting/receiving MIDI data. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such as an iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these materials, access the Yamaha Downloads website, then enter the model name for searching the desired files. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The displays are taken from the PSR-S970, and are in English. • iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Instruction conventions in this manual Throughout this manual, instructions with multiple steps are given in convenient shorthand, with arrows indicating the proper sequence. Example: [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E][F] BACKUP/RESTORE The example above describes a four step operation: 1) Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2) Press the TAB [F] button to select the MENU 2 tab. 3) Press the [G] (SYSTEM) button. 4) Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the BACKUP/RESTORE tab. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 7 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 8 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Formats “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. This instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. “SFF (Style File Format)” is an original Style file format by Yamaha which uses a unique conversion system to provide highquality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. “SFF GE (Guitar Edition)” is an enhanced format of SFF, which features improved note transposition for guitar tracks. Information  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases. • The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for some of the songs pre-installed in this instrument: Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music by Alan Menken ©1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved Used by Permission What Makes You Beautiful Words and Music by Savan Kotecha, Rami Yacoub and Carl Falk © 2011 EMI APRIL MUSIC INC., MR. KANANI SONGS, RAMI PRODUCTIONS AB and AIR CHRYSALIS SCANDINAVIA AB All Rights for MR. KANANI SONGS Controlled and Administered by EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. All Rights for RAMI PRODUCTIONS AB Administered by KOBALT SONGS MUSIC PUBLISHING All Rights for AIR CHRYSALIS SCANDINAVIA AB Administered by CHRYSALIS MUSIC GROUP, INC., a BMG CHRYSALIS COMPANY All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. 8 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 9 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Table of Contents Welcome to Digital Workstation 10 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Setting Up 16 Power Requirements ..........................................................16 Turning the Power On/Off...................................................16 Adjusting the Master Volume .............................................18 Changing the Display Language .........................................18 Playing the Demos..............................................................19 Basic Operations Voices – Playing the keyboard – 35 Playing Voices ....................................................................35 Changing the Pitch of the Keyboard ...................................38 Using the Wheels................................................................39 Using the LIVE CONTROL Knobs........................................40 Applying Voice Effects ........................................................42 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ........................45 Adding New Contents — Expansion Packs.........................46 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 48 Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment....................48 Operating Style Playback ....................................................50 Changing the Chord Fingering Type....................................52 Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (One Touch Setting)...................................................53 Finding Suitable Music Pieces for the Current Style (Repertoire) ........................................................................54 Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender).........................................................55 Turning On/Off Each Channel of the Style...........................56 Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Parts...............57 Setting the Split Point.........................................................58 Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand ...................................................59 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ...............................60 3 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 62 Playback of Songs ..............................................................62 Displaying Music Notation (Score) .....................................64 Displaying Lyrics/Text ........................................................65 Turning Each Channel of the Song On/Off ..........................65 One-handed Practice with the Guide Function ....................66 Repeat Playback .................................................................67 Recording Your Performance .............................................68 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files – 71 Playing Back Audio Files .................................................... 71 Recording Your Performance as Audio.............................. 74 5 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 76 Playing the Multi Pads ....................................................... 76 Using Chord Match ............................................................ 77 Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function ...................... 77 Creating a Multi Pad with Audio files (Audio Link Multi Pad) ....................................................... 78 6 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 80 Selecting the Desired Record (Panel Settings)................... 80 Searching for Records (Panel Settings)............................. 81 Downloading Records (Panel Settings) from the Website . 82 Registering a Song, Audio or Style File to a Record........... 83 20 Display-based Controls.......................................................20 Calling Up the Desired Display Instantly — Direct Access..23 Messages Shown in the Display .........................................23 Main Display Configuration ................................................24 File Selection Display Configuration ...................................26 File Management ................................................................27 Entering Characters ............................................................32 Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings ..................33 Data Backup .......................................................................34 1 4 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 85 Registering Your Panel Setups .......................................... 85 Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file.................. 86 Recalling a Registered Panel Setup.................................... 87 8 Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument – 88 Connecting a Microphone/Guitar ....................................... 88 Setting Up for Using a Microphone/Guitar ......................... 89 Using the Talk function ...................................................... 90 Using Vocal Harmony (PSR-S970) .................................... 91 Using Synth Vocoder (PSR-S970) ..................................... 93 9 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 95 Basic Procedure................................................................. 95 10 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 97 Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL jacks).... 97 Connecting Audio Devices (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack) ...................... 98 Connecting an External Monitor ([RGB OUT] terminal) (PSR-S970) .................................... 99 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack) .............................................. 99 Connecting USB Devices ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal) .... 100 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad ([USB TO DEVICE], [USB TO HOST] and MIDI terminals)............................... 102 Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal)..... 102 Connecting External MIDI Devices (MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals) ............................................ 103 11 Other Functions – Making Global Settings and Using Advanced Features – 104 Basic Procedure............................................................... 104 Function List .................................................................... 105 Direct Access Chart 106 Troubleshooting 107 Specifications 110 Index 112 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 9 Table of Contents Included Accessories............................................................7 About the Manuals................................................................7 Formats ................................................................................8 Information...........................................................................8 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 10 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Welcome to Digital Workstation Extraordinarily expressive and realistic Voices page 35 The PSR-S970/S770 has a comprehensive and sonically stunning set of authentic Voices, and gives you the tools to play these Voices more naturally and with greater expressiveness. Play along with a backing band page 48 The Styles of the PSR-S970/S770 make it possible to perform in a wide variety of music genres with full instrumental accompaniment, just by playing chords. Moreover, the PSRS970 features Audio Styles which bring a fresh level of realism and expressiveness, featuring actual audio recordings of topclass studio musicians. These impart all the original feel, ambience and excitement to the drums and percussion parts of the Style, and retain the subtle nuances and grooves that are difficult to reproduce using the preset drum kits. Voice and Style expandability page 46 The PSR-S970/S770 is an open-ended instrument that lets you continually expand the available content for your creative explorations. Featured on our special website (http://www.yamaha.com/awk/) are many Voices and Styles (called Expansion Pack data) that you can get and load to the PSR-S970/S770. By using the “Yamaha Expansion Manager” software, you can manage the variety of Expansion Packs and create your own custom Pack for installing on your instrument. Powerful DSP effect for enhancing the sound page 42 The PSR-S970/S770 has new and high-quality effect types, including Real Distortion and Real Reverb. On the PSR-S970, these also include VCM effects that use the same technology as the professional-level processing on Yamaha’s high-end mixers. It is provided with beautifully designed virtual panel displays, with highly intuitive controls—just like actual effect devices. Audio playing and recording with a USB flash drive Audio files (WAV or MP3 format) saved to a USB flash drive can be played back on the instrument. You can also record your performance as audio files (WAV format) to a USB flash drive— making it easy to edit your recordings on computer as desired, and share them over the Internet, or burn your own original CDs. The instrument also provides a variety of advanced, convenient audio playback and processing functions, including Time Stretch, which lets you slow down or speed up an audio file without changing the pitch, and Pitch Shift, which allows you to change the pitch without affecting the time. Moreover, a Vocal Cancel function effectively attenuates the vocals which may be positioned in the center of a file, allowing you to sing “karaoke” style with just instrumental backing. 10 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual page 71 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 11 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connect a microphone and sing along with your keyboard performance page 88 Versatile real-time controller — Live Control Welcome to Digital Workstation You can directly connect a microphone and use a variety of sophisticated processing tools. The PSR-S970 features an amazing Vocal Harmony function, which automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that you sing into a microphone. You can even change the gender of the harmony voices — for example, adding female backup to your own male voice (or vice versa) — or use the Vocal Doubler to make your single voice sound like many. The PSR-S970 also has a Synth Vocoder feature, recreating that popular effect for a variety of luscious, other-worldly sounds. Both the PSR-S970 and PSR-S770 let you connect an electric guitar, and you can even use powerful DSP effects to process the guitar sound instead, and play that along with the keyboard sounds. page 40 The two knobs to which various functions can be assigned lets you intuitively control your performance in real-time. For example, you can use the knobs to control the brightness (cutoff frequency) of the sound being played or to control the volume balance between the parts such as Voice and Style. Thus you can easily add variations to the sound without interrupting your performance. You can also control your performance easily by using the two wheels — PITCH BEND and MODULATION. The [PITCH BEND] wheel lets you bend the notes up or down, while the [MODULATION] wheel can be used to apply a vibrato effect to the notes you play (page 39). Playing with Arpeggios page 44 You can play arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing the appropriate notes on the keyboard, allowing you to instantly and automatically have complex and otherwise difficult-to-play phrases backing your performance. Explore the Demos page 19 The Demos showcase the instrument’s high-quality sounds, the variety of advanced functions, and provide helpful information for learning about your new keyboard. These are just a few of the many functions that enhance your musical enjoyment and expand your creative and performance possibilities. Try them out and enjoy your new keyboard! PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 11 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 12 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Panel Controls and Terminals  Top Panel 1 5 & 2 6 3 4 7 8 ) ! * ( A 9 @ # $ % ^ 1 [ ] (Standby/On) switch ..............................Page 16 Turns on the instrument’s power or sets to standby. 9 [METRONOME] button................................... Page 37 Turns the metronome on or off. 2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................Page 18 Adjusts the overall volume. ) [FADE IN/OUT] button.................................... Page 52 Controls fade in/out of Style/Song playback. 3 [DEMO] button ................................................Page 19 Calls up the display for selecting a Demo. ! [OTS LINK] button .......................................... Page 54 Turns on/off the OTS Link function. 4 [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button (PSR-S970) / [MIC SETTING] button (PSR-S770) .....................Page 88 Calls up the display from which you can make settings for the microphone/guitar and (on the PSR-S970) Vocal Harmony settings. @ STYLE CONTROL buttons............................. Page 50 Controls Style playback. 5 SONG buttons.................................................Page 62 Selects a Song and controls Song playback. 6 STYLE category selection buttons ...............Page 48 Selects a Style category. 7 [TAP TEMPO]/TEMPO buttons ......................Page 51 Controls the tempo for Style, Song and Metronome playback. 8 TRANSPOSE buttons .....................................Page 38 Transposes the entire pitch of the instrument in semitone steps. 12 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual # [ASSIGN] button, LIVE CONTROL knobs..... Page 40 Assigns functions and controls sounds in real time. $ [PITCH BEND] wheel...................................... Page 39 Bends the pitch of the keyboard played sound up or down. % [MODULATION] wheel ................................... Page 39 Applies vibrato effects, etc. ^ [PHONES] jack ............................................... Page 15 For connecting a pair of headphones. & LCD and related controls .............................. Page 20 * [BAL.] button .......................................... Pages 57, 74 Calls up settings for the volume balance among the parts. Page 13 C D Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Panel Controls and Terminals 12psrs970_en_om.book E F B G H I J K L ( [MIXER/EQ] button .........................................Page 95 Calls up various settings for the keyboard, Style and Song parts. A [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button...................Pages 56, 65 Calls up settings for turning Style/Song channels on or off. B [FUNCTION] button ......................................Page 104 Lets you make advanced settings and create your original Styles, Songs and Multi Pads. M G [MUSIC FINDER] button................................. Page 80 Calls up ideal panel setups for your performance. H PART SELECT buttons .................................. Page 36 Selects a keyboard part. I PART ON/OFF buttons ................................... Page 35 Turns the keyboard part on or off. J REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons ............... Page 85 Registers and recalls panel setups. C VOICE category selection buttons................Page 36 Selects a Voice category. K MULTI PAD CONTROL buttons ..................... Page 76 Selects and plays a rhythmic or melodic Multi Pad phrase. D [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button........................Page 71 Calls up the display for playing back audio files and recording your performance in audio format. L ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ..................... Page 53 Calls up the appropriate panel settings for the Style. E [USB] button ................................................. Page 101 Calls up the display for selecting a file in the USB flash drive. F VOICE EFFECT buttons .................................Page 42 Applies various effects to the keyboard performance. M UPPER OCTAVE buttons ............................... Page 38 Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps. Panel Setup (Panel Settings) By using the controls on the panel, you can make various settings as described here. These settings of the instrument are together referred to as “panel setup” or “panel settings” in this manual. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 13 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 14 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM  Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 DC IN jack .......................................................Page 16 For connecting the power adaptor. 5 [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack.............................. Page 88 For connecting a microphone or guitar. 2 FOOT PEDAL [1]/[2] jacks..............................Page 97 For connecting Footswitches and/or Foot controllers. 6 [GAIN] knob .................................................... Page 88 For adjusting the input level of the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. 3 OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks .............................Page 98 For connecting external audio devices. 4 [AUX IN] jack ...................................................Page 98 For connecting an external audio device, such as a portable audio player. Air Vents NOTICE This instrument has special air vents in the top panel and rear panel. Do not place objects where they might block the air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Attaching the Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. 14 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 7 [MIC GUITAR] switch ..................................... Page 88 For switching between “MIC” and “GUITAR” for proper use of the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. Air Vents 8 9 ) Page 15 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM ! Panel Controls and Terminals 12psrs970_en_om.book 8 MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals.............................Page 103 For connecting external MIDI devices. 9 [USB TO HOST] terminal..............................Page 102 For connecting to a computer. ) [USB TO DEVICE] terminal ..........................Page 100 For connecting a USB device such as a USB flash drive. ! [RGB OUT] terminal (PSR-S970) ...................Page 99 For connecting to an external monitor. Using the Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to the [PHONES] jack. Standard stereo phone plug CAUTION Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 15 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 16 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Setting Up Power Requirements Connect the AC adaptor in the order shown in the illustration. 3 2 AC Outlet 1 AC adaptor Power cord DC IN jack (page 14) The shape of the plug and outlet differs depending on your area. WARNING Use the specified AC adaptor (page 111) only. Using the wrong AC adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. CAUTION When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn the power off and disconnect the plug from the outlet. NOTE Follow the order shown above in reverse when disconnecting the AC adaptor. Turning the Power On/Off 1 Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to “MIN”. 2 2 Press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. After the Main display appears, adjust the volume as desired while playing the keyboard. 3 After you finish using the instrument, turn off the power by pressing and holding the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for about a second. NEXT PAGE 16 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE Do not press the foot pedal or move the [PITCH BEND] wheel, etc. when turning the power on. Doing so may cause the instrument to malfunction. NOTE Until the Main display appears, no operations can be carried out, including power-off and keyboard performance. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 17 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM CAUTION Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. NOTICE Setting the Auto Power Off function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off is approximately 30 minutes by default; however, you can change the setting. 1 NOTICE Any data which has not been saved to the USER or USB drive will be lost if the power automatically turns off. Make sure to save your data before the power turns off (page 28). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E] CONFIG 1 2 3 2 Press the [B] button several times to select “4 AUTO POWER OFF.” 3 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the value. If you do not want to turn the power off automatically (disable the Auto Power Off), select DISABLED. Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the display. Disabling Auto Power Off (simple method) Turn the power on while holding down the lowest key on the keyboard. A message appears briefly, then the instrument starts up with the Auto Power Off function disabled. C1 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 17 Setting Up While recording or editing, or while a message is displayed, the power cannot be turned off even if you press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch. If you want to turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch after recording, editing, or after the message has disappeared. If you need to force-quit the instrument, hold down the [ ] (Standby/On) switch for longer than three seconds. Note that the force-quit operation might cause data loss and damage to the instrument. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 18 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Adjusting the Master Volume To adjust the volume of the entire keyboard sound, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial while playing the keyboard. CAUTION Do not use the instrument at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. Changing the Display Language This determines the language (English, German, French, Spanish and Italian are available) used in the display for messages. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E] OWNER 2 2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select the desired language. Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the display. 18 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 19 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Playing the Demos The Demos provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features and functions as well as dynamic demonstrations of the high-quality sounds. Press the [DEMO] button to call up the Demo display. 2 Press one of the [A] – [E] buttons to show a specific Demo. Setting Up 1 Pressing one of the [F] – [J] buttons plays back the overview Demo continuously, calling up the various displays in sequence. NOTE To return to the higher level menu, press the [EXIT] button. Sub menus may be shown on the display. Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired sub menu. 3 Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the Demo display. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 19 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 20 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Basic Operations Display-based Controls The LCD provides comprehensive at-a-glance information on all current settings. The displayed menu can be selected or changed by the controls around the LCD. 2 TAB [E][F] buttons 1 [A] – [J] buttons [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 23) 1 [A] – [J] buttons 3 [1 ] – [8 ] buttons 4 Data dial and [ENTER] button 5 [EXIT] button 1 [A] – [J] buttons The [A] – [J] buttons are used to select the corresponding menu items shown next to them. • Example 1 In the File Selection display (page 26), the [A] – [J] buttons can be used to select the corresponding files. • Example 2 The [A] and [B] buttons are used to move the cursor up or down. 20 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual The [F] and [H] buttons are used to select the corresponding parameter. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 21 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 2 TAB [E][F] buttons Basic Operations These buttons are used to change the pages of displays that have “tabs” at the top. 3 [1 ] – [8 ] buttons The [1 ] – [8 ] buttons are used to make selections or adjust settings (up or down correspondingly) for functions shown directly above them. For menus that appear in this section of the display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons. For menus that appear in this section of the display, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons. For list menus that appear, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to select the desired item. For parameters that appear in slider (or knob) form, use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the value. To reset the desired parameter value to its default, simultaneously press both the [] and [] buttons below it. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 21 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 22 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 4 Data dial and [ENTER] button Depending on the selected display, the Data dial can be used in the following two ways. • Selecting files (Voice, Style, Song, and so on) When one of the File Selection displays (page 26) is shown, you can use the Data dial and the [ENTER] button to select a file. Press the [ENTER] button to actually select the file. The selected file is highlighted. Rotate the Data dial to move the cursor. • Adjusting parameter values You can conveniently use the Data dial in tandem with the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust parameters indicated in the display. Rotate the Data dial to adjust the selected parameter. Select the desired parameter with the appropriate [1 ] – [8 ] button. This convenient technique also works well with pop-up parameters such as Tempo and Transpose. Simply press the appropriate button (ex., TEMPO [+]), then rotate the Data dial to set the value. 5 [EXIT] button Pressing the [EXIT] button returns to the previously indicated display. Pressing the [EXIT] button several times returns to the default Main display (page 24). 22 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 23 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Calling Up the Desired Display Instantly — Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. Refer to the “Direct Access Chart” on page 106 for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. 1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Press the button (or move the knob, wheel or connected pedal) corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. Basic Operations 2 For example, pressing the [GUIDE] button calls up the display in which the Guide mode can be set. Messages Shown in the Display A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate button. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 23 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 24 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Main Display Configuration The display that appears when the power is turned on is the Main display. This display shows the current basic settings such as the currently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard. # @! NOTE You can quickly call up the Main display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, followed by the [EXIT] button. $ % ^ 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 ) 1 Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [A] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 62). 2 BAR/BEAT/Tempo Displays the current position (bar/beat/tempo) in Style playback or Song playback. 3 Current chord name When the [ACMP] button is set to on, the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard will be displayed. When the Song containing the chord data is played, the current chord name will be displayed. 4 Split Point Displays the Split Point positions (page 58). 5 MIC/Guitar input level indicator (PSR-S970) When a microphone/guitar is connected, this indicates the input level. Adjust the level with the [GAIN] knob on the rear panel so that the indicator lights in green or yellow (but not in red). For details on connecting a microphone/guitar, refer to page 88. Pressing the [B]/[C]/[D] buttons calls up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display. 6 Style name and related information Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. Pressing the [E] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 48). 7 Voice name Displays the Voice names currently selected for RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT parts (page 35). Use the [F], [G] and [H] buttons to call up the Voice Selection display for the corresponding part: Press the button once to highlight the part’s Voice, then once more to call up the Voice Selection display. 24 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 25 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 8 Multi Pad Bank name Displays the names of the selected Multi Pad Bank. Pressing the [I] button calls up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display (page 76). 9 Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name and Registration Memory number. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 86). ) Volume Balance or Channel On/Off settings Press the [BAL.] button to call up the Volume Balance displays, and press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF displays. ! LIVE CONTROL knob information Indicates the currently selected number of the eight available LIVE CONTROL knob assignments (page 40). @ Vocal Harmony type (PSR-S970) Displays the currently selected Vocal Harmony type (page 91). # USB Audio Player/Recorder information Displays information for the selected audio file in the connected USB flash drive (page 71), including the elapsed playback time, file name and Repeat mode icon. When the audio recording is in standby, a “WAITING” indication appears. While recording, “RECORDING” appears. $ Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 38). % Upper Octave Displays the amount that the octave value is shifted (page 38). ^ Registration Sequence Appears when the Registration Sequence is active. For instructions on programming the sequence, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 7. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 25 Basic Operations NOTE Displays the volume balance (page 57) or channel on/off settings (pages 56, 65) among the parts. Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to change the settings. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 26 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM File Selection Display Configuration The File Selection display is for selecting Voice, Styles, and other data. The File Selection display appears when you press one of the VOICE or STYLE category selection buttons, the SONG [SELECT] button, etc. 1 2 3 1 Location (drive) of data • PRESET..........Location where pre-programmed (preset) data is stored. • USER...............Location where recorded or edited data is saved. Installed Expansion Voices or Styles are also saved here in the Expansion folder. • USB .................Location where data on USB flash drive is saved. This appears only when a USB flash drive is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Selectable data (files) The files that can be selected on this display are shown. If more than 10 files exist, the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) are shown below the files. Pressing the corresponding button changes the display page. When other pages follow, the “Next” button appears, and for the previous page, the “Prev.” button appears. 3 MENU 1/MENU 2 At the bottom of the File Selection display, you can toggle the indication between MENU 1 and MENU 2 by pressing the [8 ] button. Selecting MENU 1 shows the function names related to the current file (Voice, Style, Song, etc.) while selecting MENU 2 shows the function names of the file/ folder management (page 27). 26 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. NOTE By pressing the [USB] button, you can also access Voices, Styles, and other data files which are saved in the USB flash drive (page 101). NOTE The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “files.” 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 27 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Calling up the higher level folder When the files of a folder are displayed, “UP” is shown above the [8 ] button. Pressing this button calls up the next higher level folder. Basic Operations Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. The next highest level (in this case, folder) is shown. Each folder shown in this display contains appropriately categorized Voices. This display shows the Voices in a folder. File Management You can save, name, copy, move, delete files, and you can create folders to manage the files with the buttons located lower area in the File Selection display. For information on the File Selection display, refer to page 26. NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. Restrictions for protected Songs Preset Songs and most commercially available songs are copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the file names. The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below. • Prot. 1: Indicates Preset Songs copied to the USER drive. These only can be copied/moved/deleted in the USER drive. • Prot. 2 Orig: Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER drive and USB flash drives with ID. • Prot. 2 Edit: Indicates edited “Prot.2 Orig” Song. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER drive and USB flash drives with ID. NOTE • Make sure that the “Prot.2 Orig” Song and the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song reside in the same folder. Otherwise, the “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. If you move this type of Song, make sure to move both the “Prot.2 Orig” and “Prot.2 Edit” Songs to the same folder. • Do not change the “Prot2.Orig” Song name and icon on the display. Otherwise, the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 27 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 28 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Saving a File You can save your original data (such as Songs you've recorded) as a file to the USER or the USB drive in the File Selection display (page 26). 1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. NOTE Files cannot be saved to the PRESET tab or the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the USER tab. If you want to save the data within an existing folder, select the folder here. 3 2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2. 3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button. The Character Entry window is called up. NOTE To cancel the Save operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button before step 5 below. NOTE 4 Enter the file name (page 32). Even if you skip this step, you can rename the file at any time after saving it (page 30). 5 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually save the file. The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. 28 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual In the USER tab, the maximum total number of files which can be stored differs depending on the file size and the length of the file names. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 29 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Creating a New Folder You can create folders to make it easier to find your original data. In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) to which you want to create a new folder by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. If you want to create a new folder within an existing folder, also select the folder here. NOTE The maximum number of files/folders which can be saved in a folder is 500. NOTE In the USER tab, no more than three folder levels can be created. The maximum total number of files/folders which can be saved differs depending on the file size and the length of the file/folder names. 3 2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2. 3 Press the [7 ] (FOLDER) button. NOTE To cancel creating a new folder, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. The Character Entry window is called up. NOTICE 4 Enter the name of the new folder (page 32). The created folder will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the folders in alphabetical order. Do not use “Expansion” for the folder name. Otherwise, all data contained in the “Expansion” folder will be lost when an Expansion Pack (page 46) is installed. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 29 Basic Operations 1 NOTE A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab or the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the USER tab. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 30 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Renaming a File/Folder You can rename files/folders. 1 2 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want to rename by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. NOTE Files and folders in the PRESET tab or the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the USER tab cannot be renamed. Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2. 3 Press the [1 ] (NAME) button. The window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display. 4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. 5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. The Character Entry window is called up. 6 NOTE To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Enter the name of the selected file or folder (page 32). The renamed file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. NOTICE Do not use “Expansion” for the folder name. Otherwise, all data contained in the “Expansion” folder will be lost when an Expansion Pack (page 46) is installed. Copying or Moving Files You can copy or cut files and paste them to another location (folder). You can also copy folders (but not move them) by using the same procedure. 1 2 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (PRESET, USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want to copy by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2. NEXT PAGE 30 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Files in the PRESET tab cannot be moved. They can only be copied. • Files in the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the USER tab cannot be copied/moved. • Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying. 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 Page 31 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press the [3 ] (COPY) button to copy or [2 ] (CUT) to move. The window for the Copy/Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. Pressing a button selects (highlights) the file/folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A] – [J] button again. Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL OFF) button again. 5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. 6 Select the destination tab (USER or USB) to paste the file/folder, by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. NOTE To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Basic Operations 4 If necessary, select the destination folder by using the [A] – [J] buttons. 7 Press the [4 ] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder selected in step 4. The pasted file/folder appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Deleting Files/Folders You can delete individual or multiple files/folders. NOTE 1 In the File Selection display, select the appropriate tab (USER or USB) which contains the file/folder you want to delete by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. 2 Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. Files and folders in the PRESET tab or the “Expansion” folder (page 46) in the USER tab cannot be deleted. If necessary, press the [8 ] button to call up MENU 2. 3 Press the [5 ] (DELETE) button. The window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 31 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 32 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. Pressing a button selects (highlights) the file/folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A] – [J] button again. Press the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6 ] (ALL OFF) button again. 5 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. 6 Follow the on-display instructions. NOTE To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. • YES..................Delete the file/folder • YES ALL .........Delete all selected files/folders • NO ....................Leave the file/folder as is without deleting • CANCEL .........Cancel the Delete operation Entering Characters This section covers how to enter characters for naming your files/folders, inputting keywords on Music Finder (page 81), etc. Entering characters is done in the display shown below. 2 1 4 3 1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1 ] button. • CASE ...............Capital letters, numbers, marks • case .................Lowercase letters, numbers, marks 2 Use the Data dial to move the cursor to the desired position. 3 Press the [2 ] – [6 ] and [7 ] buttons, corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another character-input button. Alternately, you can wait for a short time and the character will be entered automatically. For more information on entering characters, refer to “Other character-entry operations” below. 4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display. NEXT PAGE 32 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE When inputting lyrics in the Song Creator function (see the Reference Manual, Chapter 3), you may also enter Japanese characters (kana and kanji). NOTE • The following marks cannot be entered for a file/folder name. \/:*?"<> • File names can contain up to 41 characters and folder names can contain up to 50 characters. NOTE To cancel the character-entering operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 33 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Other Character-entry Operations • Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the Data dial, and press the [7 ] (DELETE) button. To delete all characters on the line at once, press and hold the [7 ] (DELETE) button. • Selecting custom icons for files (shown at left of file name) 1. Press the [1 ] (ICON) button to call up the ICON SELECT display. 2. Select the icon by using the [A] – [J] buttons, [3 ] – [5 ] buttons or Data dial. The display includes several pages. Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select different pages. 3. Press the [8 ] (OK) button to apply the selected icon. Basic Operations • Entering marks or spaces 1. Press the [6 ] (SYMBOL) button to call up the mark list. 2. Use the Data dial to move the cursor to the desired mark or space, then press the [8 ] (OK) button. NOTE To cancel the operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. Resetting to the Factory-programmed Settings While holding the right-most key (C6) on the keyboard, turn the power on. This resets the settings of the entire instrument (referred to as the System Setup parameters) to their factory default settings. Refer to the “Parameter Chart” in the Data List on the website for details about which parameters belong to System Setup. C6 NOTE The recorded Songs (page 68), Expansion Packs (page 46), and other files saved to this instrument are not deleted by this operation. You can also reset specified settings to the factory default value or delete all files and folders in the USER drive. Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [F] RESET. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 33 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 34 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Data Backup You can back up all data saved in the USER drive (except Protected Songs and Expansion Voices/Styles) and all settings of the instrument to a USB flash drive as a single file. 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal for the backup destination. NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. NOTE You can also back up files in the USER drive, such as Voice, Song, Style, Multi Pad and Registration Memory, by copying them individually to a USB flash drive as desired. For instructions, refer to page 30. 2 Call up the operation display. NOTE [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E][F] BACKUP/RESTORE 3 3 Press the [G] (BACK UP) button to save the data to the USB flash drive. When confirmation messages appear, follow the on-display instructions. You can also back up System settings, MIDI settings, User Effect settings, and Music Finder Records individually as desired. Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [G] SYSTEM  TAB [E][F] SETUP FILES. For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 11. NOTE Completing the back up/restore operation may take a few minutes. Restoring the Backup File To do this, press the [I] (RESTORE) button in the BACKUP/RESTORE page (see above). When confirmation messages appear, follow the on-display instructions. When the operation is completed, the instrument will be restarted automatically. 34 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTICE Move the Protected Songs (saved to the USER drive) to a USB flash drive before restoring. If the Songs are not moved, the operation deletes the data. 12psrs970_en_om.book 1 Page 35 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Voices – Playing the keyboard – The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic instrumental Voices, including piano, guitar, strings, brass, wind instruments and more. Playing Voices The Voices can be played via three keyboard parts: LEFT, RIGHT 1 and 2. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create luscious instrument textures and convenient performance combinations. For selecting the keyboard part to change the Voice For turning on/off the keyboard parts NOTE LEFT part RIGHT 2 part For a list of preset Voices of this instrument, refer to the “Voice List” in the Data List on the website. RIGHT 1 part Left-hand (LOWER) section Right-hand (UPPER) section Split Point (F#2 by default) • To play one single Voice on the entire keyboard: Turn on the RIGHT 1 or 2 part. • To play two different Voices in layer on the entire keyboard (Layer): Turn on the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts. • To play different Voices in the right- and left-hand sections of the keyboard (Split): Turn on the LEFT and RIGHT (1 and/or 2) parts. The F#2 and lower keys are used for the LEFT part while the upper keys (excluding F#2) are used for the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts. The key which divides the keyboard into the left-hand and right-hand sections is referred to as the “Split Point.” 1 Turn on the PART ON/OFF button corresponding to the part you want to use. The corresponding PART SELECT button is automatically turned on. NOTE The Split Point can be changed (page 58). NOTE You can save the Voice selection and on/off setting for each part to Registration Memory (page 85). NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 35 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 1 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 36 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 2 Make sure that the PART SELECT button corresponding to the part you want to select the Voice is turned on. 3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice Selection display.  Expansion Voices Voices additionally installed (page 46).  User Voices Voices created with the Voice Set function (refer to the Reference Manual on the website), or Voices copied to the USER drive (page 30). NOTE By pressing the [8 ] (UP) button in the Voice Selection display, you can call up the Voice categories (folders), including “GM&XG” and “GM2,” which do not have any VOICE category selection buttons. Preset Voices The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Voice category selection buttons correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [STRINGS] button to display various strings Voices. 4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Voice. You can call up the other pages by pressing the buttons that correspond to the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) or by pressing the same VOICE category selection button several times. NOTE If you pressed the [ORGAN FLUTES] button in step 3, press the [I] (PRESETS) button before proceeding to step 4. NOTE The Voice characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteristics, see page 37. NOTE You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button. (Some Voices do not have an information window.) To listen to the demo phrases for each Voice Press the [7 ] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. To stop the demo, press the [7 ] button again. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). 36 5 If necessary, repeat steps 1 – 4 above to select the Voice for the other part. 6 Play the keyboard. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 37 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Holding the LEFT part Voice (Left Hold) By turning on the PART ON/OFF [LEFT HOLD] button when the LEFT part is ON, the LEFT part Voice is held even when the keys are released. Non-decaying Voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type Voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed). This function is convenient when used along with Style playback since the sound of the chord matching Style playback is maintained. To stop the LEFT part Voice which is sounding, stop Style or Song playback, or turn the [LEFT HOLD] button off. 1 Using the Metronome Voices – Playing the keyboard – You can start or stop the metronome by pressing the [METRONOME] button. The metronome tempo can be adjusted by the same procedure as with Style tempo (page 51). NOTE You can also change the time signature, volume and sound of the metronome: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E] CONFIG 1  [A]/[B] 2 METRONOME Voice Characteristics The Voice characteristics are indicated above the Voice name — S.Art!, MegaVoice, Live!, Cool!, Sweet!, etc. • S.Art! (Super Articulation) Voices The word “articulation” in music usually refers to the transition or continuity between notes. This is often reflected in specific performance techniques, such as staccato, legato and slur. You can call up helpful information on how to play these Voices by pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button on the Voice Selection display. • Drums/Live!Drums/SFX/Live!SFX Voices (called up via the [DRUM KIT] button) These let you play various drums and percussion instruments or SFX (sound effects) sounds on the keyboard, collected together in what are called Drum/SFX kits. For details, see the “Drum/SFX Kit List” of the Data List on the website. • Organ Flutes Voices (called up via the [ORGAN FLUTES] button) These let you recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. For details, refer to page 45. NOTE • S.Art! Voices are only compatible with other models which have those types of Voices installed. Any Song or Style data you’ve created on the instrument using these Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments. • S.Art! Voices sound differently depending on the keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you turn on HARMONY/ARPEGGIO (page 42), change the transpose setting (page 38) or change the Voice Set parameters (page 47), unexpected or undesired sounds may result. For information about other Voice types, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 37 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 38 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Changing the Pitch of the Keyboard Adjusting the Pitch in Semitones (Transpose) The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons transpose the overall pitch of the instrument (the keyboard sound, Style playback, Song playback, and so on) between -12 and 12 in semitone steps. To instantly reset the transpose value to 0, press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. NOTE The Transpose functions do not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices. Transposing the pitch in the MIXING CONSOLE display You can also make detailed pitch settings (transpose, octave and tune) in the MIXING CONSOLE display called up via [MIXER/EQ]  TAB [E][F] TUNE. Adjusting the Pitch in Octaves The UPPER OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons allow you to shift the pitch of the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts up or down by one octave. Fine tuning the Pitch By default, the pitch of the entire instrument is set to 440.0 Hz according to equal temperament. This basic tuning can be changed in the display called up via [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE. The pitch can be shifted up or down between 414.8Hz and 466.8Hz in approximately 0.2 Hz increments. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 38 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 39 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Using the Wheels Using the Pitch Bend Wheel NOTE • The effects produced by using the [PITCH BEND] wheel may not be applied to the LEFT part during Style playback, depending on the Style setting. • (PSR-S970) The effects produced by using the [PITCH BEND] wheel are not applied to the Vocal Harmony effect. The maximum pitch bend range can be changed on the Mixing Console display: [MIXER/EQ]  TAB [E][F] TUNE  [H] PITCH BEND RANGE. Using the Modulation Wheel Use the [MODULATION] wheel to apply modulation effects, such as vibrato, to notes played on the keyboard. By default, this is applied to the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). Moving the [MODULATION] wheel up (away from you) increases the depth of the effect, while moving it down (toward you) decreases it. NOTE Depending on the selected Voice, the [MODULATION] wheel may control volume, filter or some other parameter instead of vibrato. NOTE To avoid accidentally applying modulation, make sure the [MODULATION] wheel is set at minimum (down) position before you start playing. NOTE You can set whether the effects caused by the [MODULATION] wheel will be applied or not to each keyboard part independently: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A]/[B] 2 MODULATION WHEEL. The effects produced by using the [MODULATION] wheel may not be applied to the LEFT part during Style playback depending on the Style setting. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 39 1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – Use the [PITCH BEND] wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The Pitch Bend is applied to all the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT). The [PITCH BEND] wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 40 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Using the LIVE CONTROL Knobs You can add dynamic variations to your performance intuitively in real time by assigning various functions such as effects to the LIVE CONTROL [1] and [2] knobs. 1 Press the [ASSIGN] button to call up the LIVE CONTROL display. 2 2 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to select the desired combination of functions. The selected number is indicated on the Main display (page 24). NOTE Pressing the [ASSIGN] button repeatedly or using the Data dial also lets you select a combination of functions. Preset Functions Knob 1 1 Voice/Filter/R1,R2 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter and the resonance for the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts to change the timbre or tone of the sound. Voice/Effect/Rev/R1,R2 Adjusts the Reverb depth for the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts. Rotating the knob to the right makes it deeper. 2 Voice/Balance/R1,R2 Adjusts the volume balance between the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts. Rotating the knob to the left increases the RIGHT 1 volume, while rotating it to the right increases the RIGHT 2 volume. Voice/Effect/Cho/R1,R2 Adjusts the Chorus depth for the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts. Rotating the knob to the right makes it deeper. 3 Voice/Attack/R1,R2 Adjusts the length of time until the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts reach their maximum level after the key is played. Rotating the knob to the right increases it. Voice/Release/R1,R2 Adjusts the length of time until the RIGHT 1 and 2 parts decay to silence after the key is released. Rotating the knob to the right increases it. 4 Voice/Arp/Velocity Adjusts the volume of Arpeggio. Rotating the knob to the right increases it. For instructions on how to use the Arpeggio function, refer to page 44. Voice/Arp/GateTime Adjusts the length of each note of Arpeggio. Rotating the knob to the right increases it. 5 Style/Retrig/OnOff,Rate Turns on/off and adjusts the length of the Style Retrigger function, which repeats a specific length of the first part of the current Style (page 48). Rotating the knob to the left-most turns the function off; rotating it to the right turns the function on and decreases the length. Chorus/Voice,Style Adjusts the Chorus depth for all keyboard parts and the Style. Rotating the knob to the right makes it deeper. NEXT PAGE 40 Knob 2 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Page 41 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Knob 1 Knob 2 Balance/Style,M.Pad Adjusts the volume balance between the Style and Multi Pad (page 76) playback. Rotating the knob to the left increases the Style volume, while rotating it to the right increases the Multi Pad volume. 6 Style/Track-Mute A Turns on/off playback of the Style channels. Rotating the knob to the left-most position turns on only the Rhythm 2 channel, and the other channels are turned off. By rotating the knob clockwise from that position, channels are turned on in the order of Rhythm 1, Bass, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, Phrase 2, and all channels are turned on when the knob reaches to the right-most position. Turning the channels on/off lets you easily change the rhythmic feel. For details on the Style channels, refer to page 56. 7 Filter/Voice,Style Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter and the resonance for all keyboard parts and the Style to change the timbre or tone of the sound. Reverb/Voice,Style Adjusts the Reverb depth for all keyboard parts and the Style. Rotating the knob to the right makes it deeper. MIC(Gt)/Volume Adjusts the volume of the microphone or guitar sound input via the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. Rotating the knob to the right increases it. (PSR-S970) MIC/VH-Balance Adjusts the volume balance between the sound input from the microphone and the Vocal Harmony effect. Rotating the knob to the left increases the input volume, while rotating it to the right increases the Vocal Harmony volume. For details on how to use the Vocal Harmony function, refer to page 91. 8 (PSR-S770) AUX/Volume Controls the input volume from the [AUX IN] jack to adjust the volume balance with the other parts. Rotating the knob to the right increases it. NOTE The eight function combinations can be edited on the PARAMETER ASSIGN display called up by pressing the [I] (ASSIGN) button. For instructions, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 3 Rotate the LIVE CONTROL knobs to control the sound while playing the keyboard or playing back the Style, etc. The Style Retrigger function is applied only to the Main section of the Style. NOTE Depending on the panel settings or how you move the knob, you may not notice any change to the parameter value, or the knob may not work properly, even if you rotate it. NOTE Pressing the [F] (RESET) button resets the selected function’s parameter value to the default, while pressing the [G] (ALL RESET) button resets all parameter values of the assignable functions. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 41 1 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 12psrs970_en_om.book 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 42 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Applying Voice Effects You can apply various effects to enhance or change the sound of the keyboard parts (LEFT, RIGHT 1 and 2). The effects can be turned on or off by using the following buttons. These effects only apply to the selected part (the PART SELECT button is on). • HARMONY/ARPEGGIO The Harmony or Arpeggio is applied to the right-hand Voices. Refer to “Applying Harmony/Echo to Your Right-hand Melody” (see below) or “Triggering Arpeggios with Your Right Hand” (page 44). • TOUCH This button turns the Touch Response of the keyboard on or off. When off, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. NOTE You can change the Touch Response type. For instructions, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. • SUSTAIN When this Sustain function is on, all notes played on the keyboard with right-hand part (RIGHT 1 and 2) have a longer sustain. • MONO When this button is on, the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at the time) with last note priority, letting you play single, lead sounds such as brass instruments more realistically. Depending on the Voice, Portamento may be produced when notes are played with legato. When this button is off, the part’s Voice is played polyphonically. • DSP/DSP VARI. With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to your music in a variety of ways — such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. The [DSP] button is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part. The [DSP VARI.] button is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. For example, this could be used to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect while you play. NOTE Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. NOTE The DSP type can be changed. On the Voice Selection display, select [5 ] (VOICE SET)  TAB [E][F] EFFECT/EQ  [A]/[B] 2 DSP. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Applying Harmony/Echo to Your Right-hand Melody Performance effects such as harmony (duet, trio, etc.), echo, tremolo and trill can be applied to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard. 1 Turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button on. 2 Select the desired Harmony or Echo type. 2-1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [B] HARMONY/ARPEGGIO 2-2 Use the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons to select “Harmony” or “Echo.” NEXT PAGE 42 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE When you select another Voice, the Harmony/Echo/Arpeggio type is automatically set to the default which is memorized as the Voice Set. For details on the Voice Set function, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 43 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 2-3 Use the [4 ] – [6 ] buttons to select the desired type. 1 2-3 Pressing one of the [7 ] (DETAIL) buttons calls up the detail setting display. For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website.  Harmony Category • Standard Duet — Strum The Harmony effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the chord or left-hand section shown below. • When the [ACMP] button is on and the LEFT part is off: NOTE For details on the Split Point, refer to page 58. Split Point NOTE The “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord. Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect • When the [ACMP] button is off and the LEFT part is on: Split Point RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices LEFT Voice and chord section for Harmony effect • When both the [ACMP] button and the LEFT part are on: Split Point (STYLE) Split Point (LEFT) LEFT Voice Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices • Multi Assign The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the keyboard parts [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 43 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 2-2 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 44 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM  Echo Category (Echo, Tremolo, Trill) The Echo, Tremolo or Trill effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (or the last two notes, if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately. 3 Play the keyboard. The effect selected in step 2 is applied to the right-hand melody. To turn off the effect, turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button off. Triggering Arpeggios with Your Right Hand The Arpeggio function lets you play arpeggios (broken chords) by simply pressing the notes of the chord. For example, you could play the notes C, E and G to trigger interesting phrases. This feature can be used for music production as well as performance. 1 Turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button on. 2 Select the desired Arpeggio type. 2-1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [B] HARMONY/ARPEGGIO 2-2 Use the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons to select a category other than “Harmony” and “Echo.” 2-3 Use the [4 ] – [6 ] buttons to select the desired type. NOTE When you select another Voice, the Harmony/Echo/Arpeggio type is automatically set to the default which is memorized as the Voice Set. For details on the Voice Set function, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. NOTE By using the Arpeggio Quantize function, Arpeggio playback can be synchronized with Song/Style playback, allowing any slight imperfections in the timing to be corrected. This can be set in the display: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] CONFIG 2. 2-2 2-3 You can set the Arpeggio volume and select the part for playing the Arpeggio in the display called up via the [7 ] (DETAIL) buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 3 Play a note or notes to trigger the Arpeggio. NOTE Arpeggio playback can be continued even after the note has been released, by assigning the Arpeggio Hold function to the footswitch. For instructions, refer to page 97. The arpeggiated phrase differs depending on the notes played. NOTE To turn off the effect, turn the [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] button off. 44 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual You can control the Arpeggio volume and the length of each note by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions on how to assign the functions to the knobs, refer to page 40. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 45 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices You can create original Organ Flutes Voices by editing the preset Organ Flutes Voices. Just as on a traditional organ, the original Voices can be created by increasing and decreasing the levels of the flute footages. The created Voices can be saved to internal memory (USER drive) or a USB flash drive for future recall. Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. The FOOTAGE page of the Voice Set display of the last selected Organ Flutes Voice is called up. If you want to edit another preset Organ Flutes Voice, press the [I] (PRESETS) button to call up the Organ Flutes Voice Selection display, and select as desired. Then, press the [5 ] (VOICE SET) button to return to the Voice Set display. 2 1 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the footage settings. The footage settings determine the basic sound of the Organ Flutes. The [1 ] buttons control two footages: 16’ and 5 1/3’. Pressing the [D] button switches between these two footages. For details on the VOLUME/ATTACK Page and EFFECT/EQ Page, see the Reference Manual on the website. NOTE Pressing the [D] button while holding down one of the [1 ] buttons can select both two footages, and lets you set the same value for them by using the Data dial. 3 If you want, you can select the Organ type and change other settings, such as Rotary Speaker and Vibrato. [A]/[B] ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated. SINE: Produces a clean, clear sound. VINTAGE: Produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound. EURO (PSR-S970 only): Produces the sound of the transistor electronic organ equipped with the electronic tremolo. [C] ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (DSP TYPE parameter in the EFFECT/EQ Page), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on. [F]/[G] VIBRATO Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF. [H] VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high). NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 45 Voices – Playing the keyboard – 1 NOTE The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 4 Page 46 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press the [I] (PRESETS) button to call up the Organ Flutes Voice Selection display. Save your Organ Flutes Voice by following the procedure on page 28. NOTE To return to the Voice Set display, press the [5 ] (VOICE SET) button. NOTICE The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without carrying out the Save operation. Adding New Contents — Expansion Packs By installing Expansion Packs, you can add a variety of optional Voices and Styles to the “Expansion” folder in the USER drive. The installed Voices and Styles can be selected via the [EXPANSION/USER] button in the VOICE or STYLE category selection buttons, allowing you to expand your music performance and creation possibilities. You can get high quality Expansion Pack data created by Yamaha, or create your own original Expansion Pack data by using the “Yamaha Expansion Manager” software on your computer. For instructions on how to install the Expansion Packs, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. For more information about Expansion Packs, access the following website: http://www.yamaha.com/awk/ To obtain the Yamaha Expansion Manager software and its manuals, access the following website: http://download.yamaha.com/ 46 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 47 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 1. Selecting GM/XG or other Voices: Voice Selection display  [8 ](UP)  [2 ] (P2) Touch Response and effect-related settings • Setting the Touch Response of the keyboard: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [A] 1 TOUCH RESPONSE • Making detailed settings for Harmony/Arpeggio: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [B] HARMONY/ARPEGGIO  [7 ] (DETAIL) 1 • Fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [E] MASTER TUNE/ SCALE TUNE  TAB [E] MASTER TUNE • Scale Tuning: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [E] MASTER TUNE/ SCALE TUNE  TAB [F] SCALE TUNE • Changing the part assignment of the TRANSPOSE buttons: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [F] KEYBOARD/PANEL  [B] 3 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN Editing parameters assigned to the LIVE CONTROL knobs: [ASSIGN]  [I] (ASSIGN) Editing Voices (Voice Set): Voice Selection display  [8 ] MENU 1  [5 ] (VOICE SET) Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.): [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [F] VOICE SET FILTER Editing Organ Flutes Voices: [ORGAN FLUTES]  TAB [E][F] VOLUME/ATTACK or EFFECT/EQ Installing Expansion Pack data: [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [F] PACK INSTALLATION  [6 ] (INSTALL) PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Voices – Playing the keyboard – Pitch-related settings 47 12psrs970_en_om.book 2 Page 48 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – The instrument features various accompaniment and rhythmic backing patterns (called “Styles”) in a variety of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many others. The Style features Auto Accompaniment, letting you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra — even if you’re playing by yourself. Playing a Style with the Auto Accompaniment 1 Press one of the STYLE category selection buttons to call up the Style Selection display. • Expansion Styles NOTE For a list of preset Styles of this instrument, refer to the “Style List” in the Data List on the website. Styles additionally installed (page 46). • User Styles Styles created with the Style Creator function (refer to the Reference Manual on the website), or Styles copied to the USER drive (page 30). Preset Styles 2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Style. You can call up the other pages by pressing the buttons that correspond to the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) or by pressing the same STYLE category selection button several times. 3 Press the [ACMP] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. NOTE The specific left-hand section of the keyboard (page 58) becomes the chord section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected Style. NEXT PAGE 48 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Although the chords will be detected according to the notes you play in the left hand section by default, you can change the chord detection area from the left hand section to the right hand section. For details, refer to page 59. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 49 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 4 Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized start. 5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts. Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. NOTE • For information on chords and Chord Fingering types, refer to page 52. • The chord specified in the chord section is shown on the Main display (page 24). NOTE Press the [START/STOP] button to stop Style playback. NOTE You can use the Style Retrigger function by assigning it to one of the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions, refer to page 40. Style Characteristics The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Style name. There are various Style characteristics; however, only the following ones are covered here. For information on others, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 160% of the default tempo • DJ Styles These Styles can be selected from the category called up via the [DANCE] button. These contain their own special chord progressions, so you can add chord changes to your performance simply by changing the root key. The Multi Pad (page 76) data in the “DJ Phrase” folder are specially created for these Styles. You can call up the suitable Multi Pads by using the One Touch Setting function (page 53). • Audio Styles (PSR-S970) The audio Styles (+Audio) have been specially produced by adding audio recordings of studio musicians playing in various recording studios worldwide. This adds all the natural feel, ambience and warmth to the drums and percussion of the Style, giving your performance greater expressive potential. Specifically, it retains the subtle nuances and grooves that are difficult to reproduce using the preset drum/percussion kit. Yamaha Time Stretch Technology allows the audio to follow your tempo changes without changing pitch, so everything stays in perfect sync. NOTE You cannot specify the chord type, such as major and minor, when using the DJ Styles. NOTE • If the tempo is set to over 160% of the default, the audio part is muted. The maximum tempo (at which the audio part can be played) is shown in brackets at the upper right corner of the Style name. • Keep in mind that the audio Styles may take more time to load than others, and that they may have certain restrictions and differ in the specific functions that can be handled. Style file compatibility This instrument uses the SFF GE file format (page 8). This instrument can play back existing SFF files, but they will be saved in the SFF GE format when the file is saved (or pasted) in this instrument. Please keep in mind that the saved file can only be played back on instruments that are compatible with the SFF GE format. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 49 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 6 You can transpose the Style playback (page 38). 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 50 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Operating Style Playback To Start/Stop Playing • [START/STOP] button Starts playback of the rhythm part of the current Style. To stop playback, press the button again. • [ACMP] button Turns the Auto Accompaniment on/off. When this button is on, both the rhythm part and Auto Accompaniment can be played back when playing chords in the chord section during Style playback. • [SYNC START] button This puts the Style playback in “standby.” The Style starts playing back when you press any note on the keyboard (when [ACMP] is off) or you play a chord with your left hand (when [ACMP] is on). While a Style is playing back, pressing this button stops the Style and puts playback in standby. • [SYNC STOP] button Make sure that the [ACMP] button is on, then press the [SYNC STOP] button, and play the keyboard. You can start and stop the Style anytime you want by simply playing or releasing the keys in the chord section of the keyboard. NOTE When the Chord Fingering type (page 52) is set to FULL KEYBOARD or AI FULL KEYBOARD, Sync Stop cannot be turned on. • INTRO [I] – [III] buttons The instrument features three different Intro sections to add an introduction before starting Style playback. After pressing one of the INTRO [I] – [III] buttons, start playback of the Style. When the Intro finishes playing, Style playback automatically shifts to the Main section. NOTE The INTRO [I] section consists of only the Rhythm part while INTRO [II] and [III] consist of all the parts as well as the Rhythm part. When you play INTRO [II] or [III], in order to have the complete Intro section sound properly, you need to play chords in the chord section with the [ACMP] turned on. • ENDING/rit. [I] – [III] buttons The instrument features three different Ending sections to add an ending before stopping Style playback. When you press one of the ENDING/rit. [I] – [III] buttons while Style is playing back, the Style will automatically stop after the ending is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. button once again, while the ending is playing. NOTE If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button when the Style is playing, a fill-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit [I]. 50 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 51 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Changing Pattern Variation (Sections) During Style Playback Each Style features four different Main sections, four Fill-in sections and a Break section. By using these sections effectively, you can easily make your performance sound more dynamic and professional. The section can be freely changed while the Style is playing back. • MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons to select the desired Main section (the button lights in red). Each is an accompaniment pattern of a few measures and it plays indefinitely. Pressing the selected MAIN VARIATION button again maintains the same section, but plays an appropriate fill-in pattern to spice up the rhythm and break the repetition. Press the selected Main section (lit in red) again. AUTO FILL function 2 When the [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned on, pressing any of the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons as you play automatically plays a fill-in section for a smooth, dynamic transition into the next (or same) section. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – The fill-in of the selected Main section plays (flashes in red). • [BREAK] button This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment. Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the Style playback automatically shifts to the Main section. About the lamp status of the section buttons (INTRO/MAIN VARIATION/BREAK/ENDING) • Red: The section is currently selected. • Red (flashing): The section will be played next, following the currently selected section. * The MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] buttons also flash red during fill-in playback. • Green: The section contains data but is not currently selected. • Off: The section contains no data and cannot be played. Adjusting the Tempo The TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons let you change the playback tempo of Style, Song and Metronome. The tempo of the Style and Song can also be adjusted via the [TAP TEMPO] button. • TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons Press the TEMPO [-] or [+] button to call up the Tempo pop-up display. Use the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons to decrease or increase the tempo over a range of 5 – 500 beats per minute. Holding down either button can change the value continuously. Pressing both TEMPO [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously lets you call up the default tempo of the last selected Style or Song. NOTE If you want to adjust the tempo of an Audio file, use the Time Stretch function on page 73. In the case of audio Styles (page 49), the maximum tempo at which the audio part can be played is shown under the current tempo. • [TAP TEMPO] button During playback of a Style or Song, you can change the tempo by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo. When Style and Song are stopped, tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) starts Style playback at the tempo you tapped. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 51 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 52 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Fading In/Out • [FADE IN/OUT] button This produces smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting/stopping the playback of a Style or Song. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button when playback is stopped and press the [START/STOP] button for Style (or the [PLAY/PAUSE] button for Song) to start playback with a fade in. To stop the playback with a fade out, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button during playback. Changing the Chord Fingering Type By changing the Chord Fingering type, you can automatically produce appropriate accompaniment even if you don’t press all of the notes which comprise a chord. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [F] CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons to select a Chord Fingering type. NOTE When the chord detection area is set to “UPPER” (page 59), only “FINGERED*” is available. This type is basically same as “FINGERED,” except that “1+5,” “1+8” and Chord Cancel are not available. The following types can be selected, for example. • SINGLE FINGER This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two or three fingers. Major chord Minor chord Seventh chord Minor seventh chord Press the root key only. Simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. Simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. Simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. • FINGERED This lets you specify the chord by pressing the notes making up a chord in the left hand section of the keyboard when [ACMP] is turned on or the LEFT part is turned on. For information on which notes to press for each chord, use the Chord Tutor function (page 53) or refer to the Reference Manual on the website. • AI FULL KEYBOARD This lets you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands — like conventional playing of a piano — and still have appropriate accompaniment. You don’t have to worry about specifying the chords. (Depending on the song arrangement, AI Full Keyboard may not always produce appropriate accompaniment.) For other types, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 52 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 53 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Using the Chord Tutor Function NOTE Depending on the chord, some notes may be omitted. Calling up Appropriate Panel Settings for the Current Style (One Touch Setting) One Touch Setting (OTS) is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you. 1 Select a Style (steps 1 – 2 on page 48). 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. 2 NOTE For information on the panel settings that are called up by One Touch Setting, refer to the OTS section of “Parameter Chart” in the Data List on the website. Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the current Style, it also automatically turns on [ACMP] and [SYNC START], so that you can immediately start playing the Style. Confirming the One Touch Setting contents In the Style Selection display, press the [6 ] (OTS INFO) button (when MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display) to call up the Information window that shows what Voices are assigned to the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons for the current Style. NOTE If a Voice name is shown in gray, this indicates that the corresponding Voice part is turned off when pressing the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. To close the window, press the [F] (CLOSE) button. 3 As soon as you play a chord in the chord section, the selected Style starts. Each Style has four One Touch Setting setups. Press other ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons to try out other setups. NOTE You can memorize original settings to One Touch Setting. For instructions, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 53 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – With this function shown in the right half of this display, you can see which notes to press for specifying the chord. If you know a chord name but don’t know how to play it, use this function. Although this function shows how to play a chord only in case of “FINGERED,” the indication is useful also when a type other than “SINGLE FINGER” is selected. Use the [6 ] buttons to select the chord root then use the [7 ] – [8 ] buttons to select the chord type. The notes you need to play are shown in the display. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 54 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link) The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A – D). The Main sections A, B, C and D correspond to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. To use the OTS Link function, turn the [OTS LINK] button on. NOTE You can change the timing in which the One Touch Settings change along with MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] changes. For instructions, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Finding Suitable Music Pieces for the Current Style (Repertoire) You can search for music pieces and songs that are most suitable for playing with the current Style by using the Music Finder Records (page 80). You can automatically call up appropriate settings such as Voice, effect and pedal by selecting the desired music piece. For optimum use of the Repertoire function, we recommend that you import Music Finder Records (page 82). 1 Select the desired Style (steps 1 – 2 on page 48). 2 Press the [4 ] (REPERTOIRE) button. NOTE The MUSIC FINDER display is automatically called up, and the music pieces which can be played with the current Style are shown. Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). 3 3 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired music piece (Record). The appropriate panel settings for playing the music piece are called up. 4 54 As soon as you play a chord in the chord section, the selected Style starts. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE Depending on the particular selected Style, there may not be any Records called up. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 55 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender) This convenient function “recommends” optimum Styles for your performance, based on the rhythm you play for one or two measures. 1 In the Style selection display (page 48), press the [7 ] (RECOMMEND) button to call up the STYLE RECOMMENDER display. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). The keyboard is divided at the B1 key into two sections as below. Snare Hi-Hat Kick 2 Piano B1 The Drum instruments (Kick, Snare and Hi-Hat) are assigned to the left of the B1 key while the Piano sound is assigned to the right. 2 Use the Style Recommender function to find the Style. 2-1 Press the [J] (START) button to start the metronome, indicating that the Style Recommender function starts. NOTE Pressing the [J] button toggles between START and CANCEL. 2-2 Use the TEMPO [-]/[+] buttons or [TAP TEMPO] button to adjust the tempo, and press the [E] (METRONOME) button to select the beat. 2-3 Play what you have in mind on the Piano section (ideally by using both hands) or play the rhythm on the Drum section for one or two measures along with the metronome. The performance is analyzed over several seconds, then playback of the most recommended Style starts. In addition, the candidates of the other recommended Styles are listed in the display. • Example 1: Play the following song on the Piano section. NOTE For better results, start playing from the next measure when a song you want to play starts from the middle of a measure, or the song has a short silence prior to the first note. The Styles that best match your performance having similar tempos are listed. • Example 2: Play the following rhythm on the Drum section. Snare Kick The Styles that contain similar drum patterns are listed. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 55 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Drum 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 Page 56 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Select the desired Style from the list by using the [2 ] – [7 ] buttons. Try playing the keyboard along with the Style to see if it matches what you want to play. If the Style called up doesn’t match what you want to play, press the [J] (RETRY) buttons, then return to step 2-3. 4 When you’ve found a Style you’re satisfied with, press one of the [8 ] (OK) buttons to exit from the STYLE RECOMMENDER display. 5 Play the keyboard along with the Style you just found. Turning On/Off Each Channel of the Style Each Style contains the channels listed below. You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays. Style channels • RHY1, 2 (Rhythm 1, 2): These are the basic parts of the Style, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. • BASS: The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the Style. • CHD1, 2 (Chord 1, 2): These are rhythmic chord backing parts, commonly used with piano or guitar Voices. • PAD: This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir, etc. • PHR1, 2 (Phrase 1, 2): These parts are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. (PSR-S970) • AUDIO: This is an audio part of the audio Style (page 49). 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button repeatedly if necessary to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF (STYLE) display which contains the desired channel. On the PSR-S970, there are two pages, 1/2 and 2/2 for Style channels. The PSR-S770 has only one page. NOTE For information on the CHANNEL ON/ OFF (SONG) display, refer to page 65. 2 2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to turn the channels on or off. To listen to only one channel by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. NEXT PAGE 56 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE You can save the settings here to Registration Memory (page 85). 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 57 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM To change the Voice for each channel Press one of the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons corresponding to the desired channel to call up the Voice Selection display (page 36), then select the desired Voice. NOTE The Audio channel does not have a Voice and, hence, cannot be changed. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the CHANNEL ON/OFF display. NOTE You can also turn Style channels on/ off for dynamic effect by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions on how to assign the functions to the knobs, refer to page 40. 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Adjusting the Volume Balance Between the Parts You can adjust the volume balance between the parts (Song, Style, LEFT, RIGHT 1/2, etc.). 1 Press the [BAL.] button once or twice to call up the desired page of the BALANCE display which contains the desired channel. There are two pages, 1/2 and 2/2. 2 2 Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to adjust the volume of the desired parts. In the BALANCE 1/2 page, you can adjust the volume balance between the Song (page 62), Style, Multi Pad (page 76), microphone (or guitar) and keyboard parts (LEFT, RIGHT1 and 2). In the BALANCE 2/2 page, you can adjust the volume balance between the Song (MIDI), Audio (page 71), sound input from the [AUX IN] jack, and all keyboard parts (KBD). For information on the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons, refer to page 74. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the BALANCE display. NOTE • You can also control the volume balance between the parts by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions on how to assign the functions to the knobs, refer to page 40. • On the VOL/VOICE page of the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 95), you can adjust the volume for the Song and Style parts independently. NOTE When the UD-WL01 USB Wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the instrument, “WLAN” appears in the BALANCE 2/2 page, and the volume of the audio input via an iPhone/iPad application tool (page 102) can also be adjusted. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 57 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 58 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Setting the Split Point The key which divides the keyboard into two sections is referred to as “Split Point.” There are two Split Points: Split Point (LEFT) and Split Point (STYLE). Split Point (STYLE) Chord section Split Point (LEFT) LEFT Voice section RIGHT 1, 2 Voices section Right-hand (UPPER) section Left-hand (LOWER) section • Split Point (LEFT): Divides the keyboard into the left-hand (LOWER) section and the right-hand (UPPER) section. • Split Point (STYLE): Divides the left-hand (LOWER) section into the chord section and the LEFT Voice section. 1 Call up the Split Point display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E] SPLIT POINT 2 Set the Split Point. NOTE You can also specify each Split Point by note name, using the [3 ]–[6 ] buttons. [F] STYLE + LEFT Sets Split Point (STYLE) and Split Point (LEFT) to the same note. Press the [F] button and rotate the Data dial. You can also specify the Split Point directly from the keyboard by pressing the desired key on the keyboard while holding the [F] button. Split Point (STYLE + LEFT) Chord + LEFT Voice (Lefthand) section [G] STYLE [H] LEFT RIGHT 1, 2 Voices (Right-hand) section Sets each Split Point individually. Press one of the desired buttons and rotate the Data dial. You can also specify the Split Point directly from the keyboard by pressing the desired key on the keyboard while holding the appropriate button, [G] or [H]. NOTE Split Point (LEFT) cannot be set lower than Split Point (STYLE). 58 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 59 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand By changing the chord detection area from the left-hand section to the right-hand section, you can play a bass line with your left hand while using your right hand to control Style playback. 1 Call up the Split Point display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E] SPLIT POINT Use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to set the CHORD DETECTION AREA to “UPPER.” Split Point (STYLE) 2 Split Point (LEFT) LEFT Voice section (LOWER section) Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 RIGHT 1, 2 Voices section (UPPER section) Chord section 2 With this setting, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section functions as the Chord section as well as for melody performance. In this condition, note the following points: • In the right-hand (UPPER) section, you can specify the chord type as you play the melody. • When the Manual Bass function is turned on via the [E] button, the Voice for the Bass part of the current Style is muted and assigned to the left-hand (LOWER) section. • The Chord Fingering setting (page 52) will be set to a specific type (“FINGERED*”) automatically, in which case you should press three or more notes simultaneously to specify the chord. Pressing two or less notes does not change the chord type. • Split Point (STYLE) is unavailable. NOTE This type is basically same as “FINGERED,” except that “1+5,” “1+8” and Chord Cancel are not available. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 59 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 60 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) The Style Creator function lets you create original Styles by recording rhythm patterns from the keyboard and using already-recorded Style data. Basically, select a preset Style that is closest to the type you want to create, then record the rhythm pattern, bass line, chord backing, or phrase (referred to as “Source Pattern” in the Style Creator) for each channel of each Section. This section gives you a brief introduction of the Style Creator function. For instructions on how to use the function, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Style Data Structure — Source Patterns A Style is made up of the different Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each Section has eight separate channels, each of which is referred to as “Source Pattern.” With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the Source Pattern for each channel, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. Ending 3 Ending 2 Intro Fill In Main B Main A (Only for PSR-S970) Used as is when selecting an Audio Style as starting data. This cannot be edited or deleted. Audio Part Rhythm 1 Recording or copying from another Style Rhythm 2 Recording or copying from another Style Bass Recording or copying from another Style Chord 1 Recording or copying from another Style Chord 2 Recording or copying from another Style Pad Recording or copying from another Style Phrase 1 Recording or copying from another Style Phrase 2 Recording or copying from another Style Editing the Rhythm Part of a Style (Drum Setup) The Rhythm parts of a preset Style consist of a preset Drum Kit, and each drum sound is assigned to a separate note. You may want to change the sound and the note assignments, or make more detailed settings such as volume balance, effect, etc. By using the Drum Setup function of the Style Creator, you can edit the Rhythm part of a Style and save it as an original Style. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 60 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Creating a Source Pattern for each channel separately 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 61 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 2. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [G] STYLE SETTING Memorizing original One Touch Settings: [MEMORY] + ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] Creating/editing Styles (Style Creator): [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [A] STYLE CREATOR • Realtime Recording:  TAB [E] BASIC • Step Recording:  TAB [F] EDIT  [G] STEP REC • Style Assembly:  TAB [E][F] ASSEMBLY • Editing the rhythmic feel:  TAB [E][F] GROOVE • Editing data for each channel:  TAB [E][F] CHANNEL • Making Style File Format settings:  TAB [E][F] PARAMETER • Editing the rhythm part of a Style (Drum Setup)  TAB [E] BASIC  [G] DRUM SETUP PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Style playback related settings: 61 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 Page 62 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – For the PSR-S970/S770, “Song” refers to the MIDI songs which include preset songs, commercially available MIDI format files, etc. Not only can you play back a Song and listen to it, but you can also play the keyboard along with Song playback and record your own performance as a Song. NOTE For instructions on playback and recording of audio files, refer to page 71. Playback of Songs You can play back the following types of Songs. • Preset Songs (in the PRESET tab of the Song Selection display) • Your own recorded Songs (page 68) • Commercially available Song data: SMF (Standard MIDI File) If you want to play back a Song in USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing Song data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand. 1 NOTE For information on compatible data formats, refer to page 8. NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. 2 2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location of the desired Song. 3 Select the desired Song by using the [A] – [J] buttons. NEXT PAGE 62 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 63 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. NOTE You can transpose the Song playback (page 38). Queuing the next Song for playback While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during live performance. Select the Song you want to play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is playing back. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name. To cancel this setting, press the [7 ] (NEXT CANCEL) button. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). 5 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. Playback-related Operations • Synchro Start .........While playback is stopped, hold down the SONG [J] (STOP) button and press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. The [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button flashes, indicating the standby status. You can start playback as soon as you play the keyboard. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button. • Pause ........................Press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button during playback. Pressing it again resumes Song playback from the current position. NOTE • You can adjust the volume balance between the Song and keyboard (page 57). On the VOL/VOICE page of the Mixing Console display (page 95), you can adjust the volume for each Song channel. • You can also adjust the volume balance between the Song and Audio (page 74). NOTE You can also turn specific part(s) on or off (page 65). • Rewind/Fast Forward ...............................Press the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) during playback or while the Song is stopped. Pressing either of them once moves back/forward one measure. Holding either of them scrolls backward/forward continuously. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 63 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 3 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 64 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Pressing the [G] (REW) or [H] (FF) button calls up a pop-up display showing the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number). While the Song Position pop-up is shown on the display, you can also use the Data dial to adjust the value. NOTE Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song data, which indicates a specific location in the Song. For Songs not containing Phrase Marks For Songs containing Phrase Marks You can change the unit for rewinding/fastforwarding by pressing the [D] (BAR) or the [E] (PHRASE MARK) button. • Adjusting the Tempo ...............................Same procedure as with Style tempo. See page 51. • Fading In/Out ..........Same procedure as with Style. See page 52. Displaying Music Notation (Score) You can view the music notation (score) of the selected Song. 1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 62). 2 Press the [SCORE] button to call up the SCORE display. NOTE This instrument can display the music notation of your recorded Song, or commercially available MIDI files (only those which allow devices to indicate notation). You can look through the entire notation by using the TAB [E][F] buttons when the Song playback is stopped. As Song playback starts, the “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position. NOTE The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song — especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes. You can change the displayed notation style by using the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 64 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 65 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Displaying Lyrics/Text When the selected Song contains lyrics data, you can view it on the instrument’s display. Even if the Song does not contain lyrics data, you can view the lyrics on the display by loading the text file (.txt file less than 60 KB) created on a computer via USB flash drive. Text display allows for a variety of useful and convenient possibilities, such as the showing of lyrics, chord charts, and performance notes. 1 Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 62). 2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to call up the LYRICS/TEXT display. NOTE When the lyrics are garbled or unreadable, you may need to change the Lyrics Language setting: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SETTING. You can switch between the LYRICS display and the TEXT display by using the [1 ] buttons. NOTE (PSR-S970) The Lyrics (text) can be displayed on an external monitor (page 99). NOTE Information about Text File selection can be memorized to the Registration Memory (page 85). NOTE You can conveniently turn to the next/ previous text page by assigning the function to the foot pedal: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E] FOOT PEDAL For more information about the LYRICS (TEXT) display, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Turning Each Channel of the Song On/Off A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button several times to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF (SONG) display. 2 NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 65 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – When the Song data contains lyrics data, the lyrics are shown on the LYRICS display. You can look through the entire lyrics by using the TAB [E][F] buttons when Song playback is stopped. As Song playback starts, the color of the lyrics changes, indicating the current position. To view the text file on the TEXT display, press one of the [5 ]/[6 ] (TEXT FILES) buttons to call up the File Selection display and select the desired file created on your computer. 3 12psrs970_en_om.book 2 Page 66 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to turn each channel on or off. If you want to play back only one particular channel (solo playback), press and hold down one of the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired channel to SOLO. Only the selected channel is turned on and others are off. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again. NOTE Usually, each part is recorded to the following channels. Channels 1 − 3: keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, LEFT, RIGHT 2) Channels 5 − 8: Multi Pad parts Channels 9 − 16: Style parts One-handed Practice with the Guide Function You can mute the right-hand part to try practicing that part on your own. The explanations here apply when you practice the right-hand part with “Follow Lights” of the Guide functions. You can practice at your own pace — since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly. In the SCORE display, you can see the note to play and the current position. 1 Select a Song and call up the SCORE display (page 64). 2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on. 2 3 3 Turn the [TR 1] button off to mute the right-hand part. You can now play that part by yourself. 4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. NOTE Usually, Ch 1 (right-hand part) is assigned to [TR 1] button, Ch 2 (lefthand part) is assigned to [TR 2] button, and Ch 3 − 16 are assigned to [EXTRA TR] button. Practice the muted part while viewing the SCORE display. The playback of the left and extra parts will wait for you to play the notes correctly. After your practice, turn the [GUIDE] button off. Other Guide functions In addition to the “Follow Lights” function explained above, there are more functions in the Guide features, for practicing the timing of playing the keys (Any Key), for Karaoke or for practicing a song at your own pace (Your Tempo). [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SETTING  TAB [E] GUIDE/CHANNEL  [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE For more information, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 66 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 67 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Repeat Playback The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases. To repeat a Song, turn the [REPEAT] button on and play back the desired Song. Turning the [REPEAT] button off cancels Repeat playback. NOTE You can play multiple Songs repeatedly: [FUNCTION] TAB [E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SETTING  TAB [F] OTHERS [G] REPEAT MODE. Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Select a Song (steps 1 – 3 on page 62). 2 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. 3 Specify the repeat range. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly. 3 NOTE Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. NOTE Top of the Song A B End of the Song When you want to repeat from the top of the Song to the middle of the Song: 1 Press the [REPEAT] button, then start Song playback. 2 Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). 4 To stop playback, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button. The Song position returns to Point A and pressing the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/ PAUSE) button lets you start from that point again. After you’ve finished practicing, press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped 1. Fast-forward the Song to Point A, then press the [REPEAT] button. 2. Fast-forward the Song to Point B, then press the [REPEAT] button again. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 67 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 1 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 68 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Recording Your Performance You can record your performance and save it as a MIDI file (SMF format 0) to the USER drive or USB flash drive. Since the recorded data is MIDI, you can easily edit your Songs. Two recording methods are available: • Quick Recording.....................see section below You can record all parts of your performance at once or a specific part (righthand, left-hand or Style playback). • Multi Track Recording...........page 69 You can record data to each channel one by one, to create a single, multi-part Song. The channel/part assignments can be freely changed. NOTE For instructions on the recording of audio songs (files), see page 74. NOTE Audio data such as the rhythm channels created via the audio data of audio Style (page 49), Audio Link Multi Pad (page 78) and audio files (page 71) cannot be recorded to the MIDI Songs. Quick Recording Before recording, make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection. With this recording, each part will be recorded to the following channels. • Keyboard parts: channels 1 – 3 • Multi Pad parts: channels 5 – 8 • Style parts: channels 9 – 16 1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set, and the Song name on the Main display (page 24) is set to “NewSong.” 2 Press the SONG [REC] button. NOTE To cancel the recording, press the [J] (STOP) button before going on to step 3. The [REC] and [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) buttons flashes, indicating the standby status. 3 Start recording. You can start recording by playing the keyboard, starting a Style, playing a Multi Pad or pressing the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. 4 After you finish your performance, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. A message may appear prompting you to save the recorded data. Press the [EXIT] button to close the message. NEXT PAGE 68 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE You can use the metronome (page 37) while recording; however, the metronome sound will not be recorded. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 69 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 5 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance. 6 Save the recorded performance as a Song. NOTICE 6-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. 6-2 Save the recorded data as a file by following the instructions on page 28. The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without carrying out the Save operation. Recording a specific part In place of step 2, pressing the SONG [TR1] (or [TR2]) button while holding the [REC] button enables you to record only the right-hand (or left-hand) part. Pressing the [EXTRA TR] button while holding the [REC] button enables recording of only Style and Multi Pad playback. Recording Each Channel Individually (Multi Track Recording) You can create a Song consisting of 16 channels by recording your performance to each channel one by one. In recording a piano piece, for example, you can record the right-hand part to channel 1 then record the left-hand part to channel 2, allowing you to create a complete piece which may be difficult to play live with both hands together. To record a performance with Style playback, for example, record the Style playback to channels 9 – 16, then record melodies to channel 1 while listening to the already recorded Style playback. Before recording, make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection. 1 Press the SONG [REC] button and the [J] (STOP) button simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set, and the Song name on the Main display (page 24) is set to “NewSong.” 2 While holding down the SONG [REC] button, press the appropriate [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the desired channels to “REC.” To cancel the REC status of the channel, press the desired channel button. 3 3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to change the part assignment for the channel to be recorded. NOTE To cancel the recording, press the [J] (STOP) button before going on to step 4. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 69 Songs – Playing, Practicing and Recording Songs – 3 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 70 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Start recording. You can start recording by playing the keyboard, starting a Style, playing a Multi Pad or pressing the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. 5 After you finish your performance, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button to stop recording. A message may appear prompting you to save the recorded data. Press the [EXIT] button to close the message. 6 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to play back the recorded performance. 7 Record your performance to another channel by repeating steps 2 to 6 above. 8 Save the recorded performance as a Song. NOTE The Style Retrigger function (page 40) cannot be used when you are overdubbing to existing data. NOTICE 8-1 Press the SONG [SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. 8-2 Save the recorded data as a file by following the instructions on page 28. The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without carrying out the Save operation. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 3. Editing Music Notation settings: [SCORE]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons Editing Lyrics/Text display settings: [LYRICS/TEXT]  [1 ] – [8 ] buttons Using the Auto Accompaniment features with Song Playback: SONG [J] + [F/K]  [ACMP]  STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START]  STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] Song Playback related parameters: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [H] SONG SETTING • Keyboard and vocal practice using the Guide function:  TAB [E] GUIDE/CHANNEL • Playing backing parts with the Performance Assistant Technology:  TAB [F] OTHERS  [6 ]/[7 ] P.A.T. Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator): 70 [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [B] SONG CREATOR • Recording melodies (Step Recording):  TAB [E][F] 1-16 • Recording chords (Step Recording):  TAB [E][F] CHORD • Selecting the setup parameters recorded to the top position of the Song  TAB [E][F] SETUP • Re-recording a specific section — Punch In/ Out:  TAB [E] REC MODE • Editing channel events:  TAB [E][F] CHANNEL • Editing chord events, notes, System Exclusive events and lyrics:  TAB [E][F] CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 71 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files – The convenient USB Audio Player/Recorder function allows you to play back audio files (WAV or MP3) saved to a USB flash drive — directly from the instrument. Moreover, since you can record your performances and recordings as audio files (WAV) to a USB flash drive, it is possible to play back the files on computer, share them with your friends, and record your own CDs to enjoy as well. NOTE For instructions on playback and recording of MIDI Songs, refer to page 62. Playing Back Audio Files 4 1 2 Connect the USB flash drive containing the audio files to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. NOTE DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files cannot be played back. NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. NOTE While selecting the desired audio file (WAV) in the Audio Link Multi Pad function (step 5 on page 78), the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button does not function. 3 3 Press the [H] (FILES) button to call up the Audio File Selection display. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 71 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files – You can play back audio files saved to the USB flash drive in the following formats. • WAV......44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo • MP3 ......MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz sample rate, 64 – 320 kbps with variable bit rate, mono/stereo 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 72 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired file. NOTE Audio files take a slightly longer time to load than other files. 55 Viewing Audio file information Pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button calls up the Information window which you can view the file name, path, sample rate etc. of the selected red-framed file. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). To close the window, press the [F] (OK) button. 5 Press the [7 ] (AUDIO PLAY) button to start playback. The display automatically returns to the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. 6 To stop playback, press the [2 ] (STOP) button. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). NOTICE Do not attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during playback. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data. 72 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 73 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Playback-related Operations Total playback time [2 ] STOP Stops playback. [3 ] PLAY/PAUSE Starts or pauses playback at the current position. [4 ] PREV Pressing this selects the previous file; holding it moves continuously back through the current file (in seconds). [5 ] NEXT Pressing this selects the next file; holding it moves continuously forward through the current file (in seconds). [6 ] AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current audio file. NOTE The volume balance between the Song playback and audio file playback can be adjusted via the [BAL.] button. For instructions, refer to page 74. [7 ] TIME STRETCH Adjusts the playback speed by stretching/compressing the audio, compared to an original speed of 100%. Higher values result in a faster tempo. NOTE • The value can be adjusted from 70% to 160%. • Time Stretch cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate. [8 ] PITCH SHIFT Shifts the pitch between -12 and 12 in semitone steps. NOTE Pitch Shift cannot be applied to MP3 files of 48.0 kHz sample rate. [I] VOCAL CANCEL Cancels or attenuates the center position of the stereo sound. This lets you sing “karaoke” style with just instrumental backing, since the vocal sound is usually at the center of the stereo image in most recordings. A-B Repeat Playback via the [C] (A B) button The specified section (between the A and B points) can be played back repeatedly. 1. To set the A point, press the [C] button when playback reaches to the desired point. The time set as the A point is shown in at “A [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the first wedge mark in the playback progress bar. 2. To set the B point, press the [C] button again when playback reaches to the desired point. The time set as the B point is shown in at “B [--:--]” in the display, and is indicated by the second wedge mark in the playback progress bar. The specified A-B section of the audio file will now play back repeatedly. 3. To cancel Repeat playback, press the [C] button again. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 73 4 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files – Elapsed playback time 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 74 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Repeat Playback mode via the [D] (REPEAT MODE) button • Off ....................Plays through the selected file, then stops. • Single................ Plays through the selected file repeatedly. • All.....................Continues playback through all the files in the current folder repeatedly. • Random ...........Randomly and repeatedly plays back all files in the current folder. Adjusting the Volume Balance Between Song and Audio Playback Pressing the [BAL.] button once or twice calls up the BALANCE (2/2) display. In this display, you can adjust the volume balance between the Song (MIDI) and Audio by using the [2 ] – [3 ] buttons. When this is set to CENTER, the levels of the Song and Audio are equal. To instantly reset the balance to CENTER, press the [2 ] and [3 ] (or [2 ] and [3 ]) buttons simultaneously. NOTE For more information on the BALANCE displays, refer to page 57. Recording Your Performance as Audio You can record your performance as an audio file (WAV format — 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) directly to a USB flash drive. Sounds that can be recorded: • Sounds that are generated via all the keyboard parts (LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2), Song parts, Style parts, and Multi Pad parts. • Sounds of a portable audio player that are input via the [AUX IN] jack. • Sounds of a microphone or guitar that are input via the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. Maximum amount of recording time: • 80 minutes per recording, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the USB flash drive. 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection and the microphone connection (if you want to record your vocal). NEXT PAGE 74 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. NOTE If you want to record various parts separately or edit the data after recording on this instrument, record as MIDI files (page 68). NOTE Data that cannot be recorded includes: Songs protected by copyright (such as Preset Songs) and the metronome sound. 3 4 Page 75 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display. Use the [1 ] (REC) buttons to enter recording standby. Recordable time Start recording by using the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) buttons, then start your performance. The elapsed recording time is shown in the display while recording. Elapsed recording time 6 6 4 NOTICE Do not attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data. 5 After you finish your performance, use the [2 ] (STOP) buttons to stop recording. Recorded data is automatically saved to the USB flash drive as a file with the name automatically set. 7 NOTE You can use the metronome (page 37) while recording; however, the metronome sound will not be recorded. The [PLAY/PAUSE] button in the display flashes. 5 NOTE The USB flash drive of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when multiple USB flash drives are connected. Use the [3 ] (PLAY/PAUSE) buttons to play back the recorded performance. To see the file of the recorded performance in the File Selection display, press the [H] (FILES) button. NOTE The recording operation continues, even if you close the USB AUDIO PLAYER display by pushing the [EXIT] button. Press the [USB AUDIO PLAYER] button to call up the USB AUDIO PLAYER display again, then stop the recording by pressing the [2 ] (STOP) button. NOTE Keep in mind that if you make a mistake in your performance, you cannot correct it by overwriting an existing file. Delete the recorded file on the File Selection display, then record your performance again. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 75 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playing Back and Recording Audio Files – 12psrs970_en_om.book 12psrs970_en_om.book 5 Page 76 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short prerecorded rhythmic and melodic sequences adding impact and variety to your keyboard performances. Multi Pads are grouped in Banks of four each. The instrument features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of different musical genres. Moreover, the Audio Link Multi Pad function allows you to create a new pad with your audio data (WAV files) to play back during your performance. Playing the Multi Pads This section covers how to play back only Multi Pads. However, you can also play the Multi Pads during playback of a Style/Song to make your performance more interesting. 1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. Shows the Multi Pad category folders. 2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired bank. You can call up the other pages by pressing the buttons that correspond to the page numbers (P1, P2 ...) or pressing the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button repeatedly. Press the [8 ] (UP) button to call up the next higher level folder to which the Multi Pads are categorized. 3 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons to play a Multi Pad phrase. The corresponding phrase for the button starts playing back in its entirety at the currently set tempo. You can play up to four Multi Pads at the same time. 4 NEXT PAGE 76 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE There are two types of Multi Pad data. Some types will play back once and stop when they reach to the end. Others will be played back repeatedly (loop). NOTE Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 77 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press the [STOP] button to stop playback of the Multi Pad(s). If you want to stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad(s) you wish to stop. About the lamp status of the MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] buttons • Green: Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data (phrase). • Red: Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back. • Red (flashing): Indicates that the corresponding pad is in standby (Synchro Start; see below). • Off: Indicates the corresponding pad contains no data and cannot be played. NOTE • While the Style or Song is playing back, pressing the Multi Pad button starts playback at the top of the next measure. When the Style or Song is stopped, pressing the Multi Pad button starts playback immediately. • While the Style or Song is playing back, pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] or SONG [J] (STOP) button also stops playback of the Multi Pad(s). While both the Style and Song is playing back, pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) button stops playback of the Song, Style and Multi Pad(s). Using Chord Match When the [ACMP] or LEFT part is on, Multi Pad phrases automatically change the pitch to match the chord you play in the chord section. Play the chord in the chord section before/after pressing any of the Multi Pads. NOTE • Some Multi Pads are not affected by Chord Match. • The Multi Pads categorized in the “DJ Phrase” folder are specially created for DJ Styles (page 49), and only the root key can be changed. Using the Multi Pad Synchro Start Function You can start Multi Pad playback by playing the keyboard or by starting Style playback. 1 While holding the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button, press the desired button or buttons from [1] – [4]. The corresponding buttons flash in red, indicating the standby status. 2 Start playback of the Multi Pad. NOTE To cancel the standby status of the selected Pad, carry out the same operation, or simply press the [STOP] button to cancel the status of all Pads. NOTE • When [ACMP] is off, press any note, or play back a Style. • When [ACMP] is on, play a chord in the chord section, or play back a Style. When two or more Multi Pads are in the standby status, pressing any one of them starts simultaneous playback of all of them. If you put a Multi Pad in standby during Style or Song playback, pressing any note (when [ACMP] is off) or playing a chord in the chord section (when [ACMP] is on) will start Multi Pad playback at the top of the next measure. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 77 5 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – Chord Section 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 78 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Creating a Multi Pad with Audio files (Audio Link Multi Pad) You can create a new Multi Pad by making links with audio files (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution) in the USB flash drive to each of the Multi Pad. The audio files (WAV) can be data you’ve recorded on this instrument (page 71) as well as commercially available ones. Multi Pads to which audio files have been linked are called Audio Link Multi Pads. The new Audio Link Multi Pads can be saved to the USER drive or USB flash drive. 1 Connect the USB flash drive containing the audio files (WAV) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. 3 Press the [6 ] (AUDIO LINK) button to call up the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD display. A confirmation message may appear here. If so, follow the on-display instructions. NOTE Audio Link Multi Pads can neither be created nor played back during playback, recording standby or recording of audio files. NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). NOTE An audio file cannot be linked to a MIDI Multi Pad. 4 4 Select the desired Pad by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons. The WAVE File Selection display appears. 5 Select the desired audio file by using the [A] – [J] buttons. To confirm the information of the selected audio file By pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button in the WAVE File Selection display, you can confirm the information (title name, bit rate and sample rate, etc.). Press the [F] (OK) button to close it. 6 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD display. To confirm the path of the selected audio file By pressing the [H] (INFO) button in the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD display, you can confirm the path. Press the [F] (OK) button to close it. NEXT PAGE 78 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE If an Audio Link Multi Pad has been selected when you press the [6 ] (AUDIO LINK) button in step 3, the links made for the selected Pad appear. In order to create a new Pad, make sure to press the [C] (NEW BANK) button. Otherwise, you are simply reselecting the link in the selected Pad. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 79 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 7 If you want to link other audio files to other pads, repeat steps 4 to 6. 8 If desired, adjust the volume of each audio file by using the [1 ] – [4 ] buttons. By pressing the desired MULTI PAD CONTROL [1] – [4] button, you can adjust the volume while playing the Multi Pad phrase. 9 Save the settings as a Multi Pad Bank. NOTICE 9-1 Press the [I] (SAVE) button in the AUDIO LINK MULTI PAD display to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. 9-2 Save the settings as a bank file by following the instructions on page 28. 10 The setting will be lost if you select another Audio Link Multi Pad or turn the power to the instrument off without carrying out the Save operation. Press the [EXIT] button to check the new Audio Link Multi Pad in the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. The newly created Audio Link Multi Pad is marked with “Audio Link” at the upper left of the file name. If you want to change the Link setting: Select the desired Audio Link Multi Pad, then carry out the same operations as in steps 3 to 10. You can play the Multi Pad to which the audio file is assigned by selecting them in the USER or USB tab of the Multi Pad Bank Selection display. Although you can play them via the same operations in page 76, note the following limitations. NOTE Audio files (WAV) take a slightly longer time than MIDI files to load. • Make sure to connect the USB flash drive including the corresponding audio files (WAV). • Automatic repeat playback is not available. • Only one Pad can be played back at once. • Chord Match cannot be applied. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 5. Creating Multi Pads (Multi Pad Creator): [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [C] MULTI PAD CREATOR Editing Multi Pads: Multi Pad Bank Selection display  [7 ] (EDIT) PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 79 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 5 Playing the Audio Link Multi Pads 12psrs970_en_om.book 6 Page 80 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – This feature helps you call up the panel settings ideal for the music you want to play simply by selecting a Music Finder “Record,” which includes Voice and Style settings. If you want to play a certain piece of music but don't know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate, you can search for relevant Records by the title of the piece. Moreover, by registering the Song, audio and Style file saved in various locations into Music Finder, you can easily call up the desired file from the corresponding Record. Selecting the Desired Record (Panel Settings) 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. As necessary, select the tab by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. • ALL........................All Music Finder Records • FAVORITE ............Favorite Records you’ve added (for details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website) • SEARCH 1, 2 ........Search result (page 81) Each entry is called a “Record.” This shows the song titles (MUSIC) and information of the Styles included. 2 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired Record. You can also use the Data dial and the [ENTER] button. The panel settings in the Record are called up. When the Record including the Style name is selected, the [ACMP] and [SYNC START] buttons are turned on and the corresponding Style is called up. This lets you start Style playback immediately. Sorting the Records Press the [F] (SORT BY) button repeatedly if necessary to change how the Records are sorted: by MUSIC (music piece), STYLE, BEAT or TEMPO. Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to alternate the order, ascending or descending. When sorting the Records by MUSIC, you can use the [1 ] button to skip up or down through the Song names alphabetically. When sorting the Records by STYLE, you can use the [4 ]/[5 ] button to skip up or down through the Style names alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [] and [] buttons to move the cursor to the first Record. NEXT PAGE 80 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 Page 81 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Start playback of the Style by specifying the chords in the chord section. To avoid changing the tempo during Style playback when selecting another Record Press the [I] (STYLE TEMPO) button to set the “STYLE TEMPO” to “HOLD” or “LOCK.” When set to “LOCK,” the tempo will be locked while stopping as well as playing. If you want to reset the tempo every time you select another Record, set to “RESET.” Searching for Records (Panel Settings) You can search the Records by specifying a song title or keyword, using the Search function of the Music Finder. 1 In the MUSIC FINDER display, press the [6 ] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display. 2 Enter the search criteria. [A] MUSIC Calls up the Character Entry window (page 32) to enter the song title. To clear the entered title, press the corresponding [F] (CLEAR) button. [B] KEYWORD Calls up the Character Entry window (page 32) to enter the keyword. To clear the entered keyword, press the corresponding [G] (CLEAR) button. [C] STYLE Calls up the Style Selection display (page 48). After selecting the Style by the [A] – [J] buttons, press the [EXIT] button to return to the SEARCH 1 display. To clear the entered Style name, press the corresponding [H] (CLEAR) button. [D] BEAT Specifies the time signature for the search. All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY. [E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location (the tab of the upper part of the MUSIC FINDER display) for searching. [1 ] ALL CLEAR Clears all entered search criteria. [3 ] TEMPO FROM Sets the range of the tempo you want to use for the search. [4 ] TEMPO TO [5 ]/ [6 ] GENRE NOTE If you want to input two or more keywords, insert a comma between each word. NOTE If you select a beat of 2/4 or 6/8, a Style suitable for performing a song in 2/4 and 6/8 beat can be searched, but the actual Style is created by using a 4/ 4 beat. NOTE Selects the desired music genre. To cancel searching, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 81 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 6 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 Page 82 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press the [8 ] (START SEARCH) button to start the search. After the Search is completed, the resulting Records appear in the SEARCH 1 tab of the MUSIC FINDER display. If no Records are listed, try steps 1 – 3 again with another song title or keyword. 4 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select the desired Record. 5 Start playback of the Style by specifying the chords in the chord section. NOTE If you want to maintain the current search results and start another search, use the [6 ] (SEARCH 2) button in step 1. (The current search Records will remain in the SEARCH 1 tab.) Downloading Records (Panel Settings) from the Website As a factory default, some sample Records are provided in the Music Finder. To use the Music Finder function more conveniently and effectively, we recommend that you download the Records from the Yamaha website, and load them to this instrument. 1 On the computer, access the following website and download the Music Finder file (***.mfd) to the USB flash drive connected to a computer. http://download.yamaha.com/ 2 3 Connect the USB flash drive which contains the Music Finder file (***.mfd) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. NOTE Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. The number of Records 4 4 Use the [7 ] (FILES) buttons to call up the File Selection display. 5 Select the Music Finder file in the USB flash drive by pressing the [A] – [J] buttons to call up a message prompting you to select REPLACE or APPEND. 6 Press the [H] (APPEND) button if you want to add Records of the selected Music Finder file, or press the [G] (REPLACE) button if you want to replace all Records with the new ones. NEXT PAGE 82 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book 7 Page 83 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM When confirmation messages appear, follow the on-display instructions. You can confirm the Records that have been appended by checking the number of Records in the right lower corner of the display. NOTE Even after appending or replacing the Music Finder Records, you can reset them to their original factory settings by selecting the “MusicFinderPreset” file in PRESET tab of step 5. Registering a Song, Audio or Style File to a Record By registering Song, audio or Style files in various locations (PRESET, USER and USB) into Music Finder, you can easily call up your favorite files. In the Song, Audio or Style Selection display, select the desired file. For instructions on Songs, refer to page 62; for audio, page 71; and for Styles, page 48. 2 2 6 Press the [5 ] (ADD TO MF) button to call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT display. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). NOTE For details on the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT display, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 3 4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to register the file. NOTE Check that the registered Record is shown in the MUSIC FINDER display. To cancel the operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. In the STYLE column of the Record, the Song is registered as “(SONG),” the audio file as “(AUDIO)” and the Style is registered according to its Style name. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 83 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Setups for Your Performance – 1 NOTE • If you want to register files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. • Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 84 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Calling up the Song, Audio or Style registered to Music Finder You can call up the registered Song, Audio or Style in the same way as done in the sections “Selecting the Desired Record” (page 80) and “Searching for Records” (page 81). The selected file can be played back as follows. • Song: Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button or play the keyboard. To stop playback, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button. • Audio: Press the [J] (F PLAY) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. To stop playback, press the [J] (J STOP) button. • Style: Specify the chords with your left hand and play the melody with your right hand. To stop playback, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. NOTE If you want to play back a Song, audio or Style file in the USB flash drive that has been registered as a Record, make sure to connect the same USB flash drive to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. NOTE When searching for Songs or audio files (page 81), it is necessary to set the search criteria as follows. STYLE: Blank BEAT: ANY TEMPO: “---” - “---” Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 6. 84 Creating a set of favorite Records: [MUSIC FINDER]  TAB [E][F] ALL, SEARCH 1 or SEARCH 2  [H] ADD TO FAVORITE Editing Records: [MUSIC FINDER]  [8 ] (RECORD EDIT) Saving the Record as a single file: [MUSIC FINDER]  [7 ] (FILES) PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book 7 Page 85 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by simply pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Registration Memory buttons are saved as a single Bank (file). Registering Your Panel Setups 1 Make the desired panel settings, such as those for Voices, Styles and Effects. For information on the panel settings that can be registered with the Registration Memory function, refer to the Registration section of the “Parameter Chart” in the Data List on the website. 2 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section. The display for selecting the groups to be registered appears. 3 3 Determine the groups you want to register. NOTE Select the desired item by using the [1 ] – [3 ] buttons, then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [4 ]/[5 ] (MARK ON)/[4 ]/[5 ] (MARK OFF) buttons. You can also use the Data dial to select items, and the [ENTER] button to enter or remove checkmarks. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 85 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 7 12psrs970_en_om.book 4 Page 86 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons to which you wish to memorize the panel setup. NOTICE If you select the button whose lamp is lit in red or green here, the panel setup previously memorized to the button will be erased and replaced by the new settings. The memorized button becomes red, which indicates the number button contains data and its number is selected. About the lamp status • Red: Data registered and currently selected • Green: Data registered but not currently selected • Off: No data registered 5 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps 1 – 4. NOTE The panel setups registered in the numbered buttons are maintained even when you turn off the power. If you want to delete all the eight current panel setups, turn the power on while holding the B5 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). The registered panel setups can be recalled by simply pressing the desired number button. Saving the Registration Memory as a Bank file You can save all eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file. Bank 04 Bank 03 Bank 02 Bank 01 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the Registration Bank Selection Display. 2 2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file. For instructions on saving, refer to page 28. 86 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE Make sure that MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 87 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Recalling a Registered Panel Setup The saved Registration Memory Bank files can be recalled by using the REGIST BANK [-]/[+] buttons or the following procedure. 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. 2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select a Bank. You can also use the REGIST BANK [-]/[+] buttons, or the Data dial and the [ENTER] button to select a Bank. NOTE • When recalling the setups including file selection of Song, Style, text, etc. from a USB flash drive, make sure that the appropriate USB flash drive including the registered Song/ Style is connected into the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. • Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Connecting USB Devices” on page 100. NOTE Confirming the Registration Memory Information In the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, press the [6 ] (INFO) button to call up the Information window, showing which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8] buttons of a Registration Memory Bank. Turning the [FREEZE] button on lets you disable recall of specific item(s) as desired. For instructions, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. NOTE Make sure that MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display (page 26). NOTE If a Voice name is shown in gray, this indicates that the corresponding Voice part is turned off when pressing the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons. To close the window, press the [F] (CLOSE) button. 3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1] – [8]) in the Registration Memory section. Advanced Features 7 Disabling recall of specific items (Freeze): [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE  TAB [F] FREEZE Calling up Registration Memory numbers in order (Registration Sequence): [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE  TAB [E] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 7. 87 12psrs970_en_om.book 8 Page 88 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument – By connecting a microphone to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack, you can enjoy singing along with your keyboard performance or with Song playback. The instrument outputs your vocals through the built-in speakers. Moreover, on the PSR-S970, you can automatically apply various Vocal Harmony effects to your voice as you sing, or you can use Synth Vocoder to graft the unique characteristics of your voice onto synthesizer and other sounds. You can also connect a guitar to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack, and output the sound from the speakers of the PSR-S970/S770. Connecting a Microphone/Guitar 1 Before connecting a microphone or guitar, set the [GAIN] knob to the minimum position. NOTE Make sure to use a conventional dynamic microphone. NOTE • When you are not using a microphone/guitar, disconnect the cable from the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. • Always set the [GAIN] knob to minimum when nothing is connected to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. Since the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack is highly sensitive, it may pick up and produce noise even when nothing is connected. 2 Set the [MIC GUITAR] switch. When connecting a microphone, set it to “MIC.” When connecting a guitar, set it to “GUITAR.” (standard 1/4” phone plug) 3 Connect the microphone or guitar to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. 4 Turn on the power of the instrument. NEXT PAGE 88 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE When you use a guitar with active pickups, set the [MIC GUITAR] switch to “MIC,” since doing so can reduce noise. 5 Page 89 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM (If necessary, turn on the microphone.) Adjust the [GAIN] knob on the rear panel while singing into the microphone or playing the guitar. Adjust the [GAIN] knob so that the SIGNAL lamp lights in green. Make sure that the lamp does not light in orange or red, since this indicates that the input level is too high. NOTE You can also see the input level on the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display called up by the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] (PSR-S970) or [MIC SETTING] (PSR-S770) button. Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument – 12psrs970_en_om.book Disconnecting the microphone/guitar 1. Set the [GAIN] knob to the minimum position. 2. Disconnect the microphone/guitar from the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack. Setting Up for Using a Microphone/Guitar 1 Connect the microphone/guitar to the instrument (page 88). 2 Press the [MIC SETTING/ VOCAL HARMONY] (PSR-S970) or [MIC SETTING] (PSR-S770) button to call up the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display. NOTE 3 5 4 3 Settings on the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display (with the exception of the EQ/ CMP settings) can be memorized to the Registration Memory (page 85). Press the [A] (MIC/GUITAR) button to set it to ON. This lets you hear the input sound from the instrument when you talk/sing into the microphone or play the guitar. 4 If necessary, press the [C] (EFFECT TYPE) button to call up the EFFECT page of the MIXING CONSOLE display and select the effect type. NOTE For the microphone/guitar sound, the effect block should be set to DSP4. For details on the MIXING CONSOLE display, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 9. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 89 8 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 90 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM (PSR-S970) 4-1 Press the [B] button, then use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the effect category and use the [3 ]/[4 ] buttons to select the effect type. 4-2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display. NOTE The microphone/guitar volume may change depending on the selected effect type. (PSR-S770) 4-1 Use the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons to select the effect category then use the [7 ]/[8 ] buttons to select the effect type. 4-2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display. 5 If necessary, press the [B] (EQ/CMP) button to call up the EQ/ CMP SETTING display and make the EQ and compressor settings. The appropriate settings for the use of microphone are provided by default. When you use a guitar, make sure to change the settings for optimum sound. The displays below are examples of recommended settings for microphone and guitar. Microphone settings (default settings) NOTE Pressing the [H] button lets you instantly reset the settings for optimum use of an electric guitar, as follows. • [A] MIC/GUITAR: ON • [F] TALK: OFF • [4 ] HARMONY: OFF • [5 ] VOCAL EFFECT: OFF • [C] EFFECT TYPE: ASSIGN PART— MIC/GUITAR, TYPE—MultiDistBasic Guitar settings Make sure to save the microphone or guitar settings you made here to the internal memory via the [I] (USER MEMORY) button. Otherwise, the settings are not maintained and you need to make the same setups every time you use a microphone or a guitar. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 6 Sing into the microphone or play the guitar. 7 Adjust the volume balance between the microphone/guitar sound and the instrument sound on the BALANCE display (page 57). NOTE You can also adjust the microphone or the guitar volume by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions on how to assign the functions to the knobs, refer to page 40. Using the Talk function Turning the Talk function on by pressing the [F] (TALK) button in the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display lets you instantly change the settings for talking. This is useful when you want to talk between songs during a performance. NOTE To get the most convenient use of this function, you can assign a foot pedal to turn the Talk function on/off during a performance. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10. You can also change the Talk settings to suit your preferences. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 90 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 91 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Using Vocal Harmony (PSR-S970) This section covers the Vocal Harmony Effects that can be applied to your voice via the microphone. Connect the microphone to the instrument (page 88). Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument – 1 2 Press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display. 4 7 3 4 Make sure that the [A] (MIC/GUITAR) button is set to ON. 5 6 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the VOCAL HARMONY tab. Press the [E] (TYPE) button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display. Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Vocal Harmony type. To call up the other display pages for further selections, press one of the [1 ] – [5 ] buttons. The Vocal Harmony features three different modes which can be selected automatically by selecting a Vocal Harmony type. Icon Mode Chordal (Microphone and man/woman) The harmony notes are determined by the chords you play in the chord section (with [ACMP] turned on), the left hand section (with [ACMP] turned off and [LEFT] turned on) or the chord data of a Song. The harmony notes are determined in the same way as in Microphone above. However, effects such as Vocal Doubler and PokerPhaser are applied. Harmony may or may not be applied depending on the selected type. (If harmony is not applied, the [4 ] (HARMONY) buttons in the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display is set to OFF.) (Microphone) (Microphone and keyboard) 8 Descriptions Vocoder The microphone sound is output via the notes you play on the keyboard or via the Song playback notes. Vocoder Mono Same as the Vocoder mode basically. In this mode, only single-note melodies or lines can be played back (with last-note priority). NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 91 12psrs970_en_om.book 7 Page 92 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Make sure that the [4 ] (HARMONY) buttons in the MIC/ GUITAR SETTING display is set to ON. NOTE If necessary, use the [5 ] (VOCAL EFFECT) buttons to turn on the Vocal Harmony effect which can be set on the display called up via the [8 ] (EDIT) buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 8 Follow the steps below, depending on which type (and mode) you selected. If you selected one of the Chordal Types: To return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display, press the [EXIT] button. NOTE You can adjust the volume balance between the sound input from the microphone and the Vocal Harmony effect by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions on how to assign the functions to the knobs, refer to page 40. 8-1 Turn the [ACMP] button on. 8-2 Play chords with your left hand, or play back the Song which contains NOTE chord data. Vocal harmonies based on the chords are applied to your singing. If you selected a Type having an “FX” icon, your voice will be processed with effects, but may not have harmonies applied. If you selected one of the Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono Types: 8-1 Call up the SET UP window in the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display by pressing the [8 ] button. 8-2 8-2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to change the keyboard setting (OFF, UPPER, LOWER), if necessary. Select UPPER to have the Vocoder effect applied by your right-handplayed part, LOWER to have it applied by your left-hand-played part, or OFF in order to not to have any Vocoder effect applied by your keyboard playing. For more information on the keyboard setting for controlling the Vocoder effect, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 8-3 Play melodies on the keyboard or play back a Song, and sing into the microphone. You’ll notice that you don’t actually have to sing pitched notes. The microphone sound is output via the notes or note you play on the keyboard or Song playback. 92 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE For Vocoder Types, the effect is applied to a maximum of three notes of the chord you play; for Vocoder-Mono, the effect is only applied to a single note (last note played). 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 93 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Using Synth Vocoder (PSR-S970) 1 Carry out steps 1 – 4 in “Using Vocal Harmony” on page 91. 2 From the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display, use the TAB [][] buttons to select the SYNTH VOCODER tab. 2 3 3 4 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Synth Vocoder type. NOTE To return to the MIC/GUITAR SETTING display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure that the [4 ] (HARMONY) buttons in the MIC/ GUITAR SETTING display is set to ON. If necessary, use the [5 ] (VOCAL EFFECT) buttons to turn on the Vocal Harmony effect which can be set on the display called up via the [8 ] (EDIT) buttons. For details, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. 5 Try holding down a note on the keyboard and speak or sing into the microphone. Also, try changing notes as you say/sing different words, hitting a separate note for each word. NOTE You can change the keyboard setting (OFF/UPPER/LOWER), determining which part of the keyboard (or Song) controls the effect. See steps 8-1 and 8-2 on page 92. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 93 Microphone/Guitar Input – Using a Microphone or Guitar with the Instrument – These are special effects that graft the characteristics of your voice input from the microphone onto synthesizer and other sounds, for unusual machine‐like or robotic effects, as well as unique choir sounds, which you can control with your own singing and playing. 8 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 94 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 8. Making the microphone/guitar settings: (PSR-S970) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY], (PSRS770) [MIC SETTING]  [B] (EQ/CMP) Saving the microphone/guitar settings: (PSR-S970) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY], (PSRS770) [MIC SETTING]  [B] (EQ/CMP)  [H] (USER MEMORY)  [6 ] (SAVE) (PSR-S970) Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control parameters: (PSR-S970) Editing the Vocal Harmony Types: [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [E] (TYPE)  [8 ] (SET UP) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [E] (TYPE)  TAB [] VOCAL HARMONY  (select a Vocal Harmony type)  [8 ] (EDIT) • Editing the OVERVIEW tab parameters:  TAB [] OVERVIEW • Editing the PART tab parameters:  TAB [][] PART • Editing the DETAIL tab parameters:  TAB [] DETAIL (PSR-S970) Editing the Synth Vocoder Types: [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY]  [E] (TYPE)  TAB [][] SYNTH VOCODER  (select a Synth Vocoder type)  [8 ] (EDIT) 94 • Editing the OVERVIEW tab parameters:  TAB [] OVERVIEW • Editing the DETAIL tab parameters:  TAB [] DETAIL PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book 9 Page 95 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts and Style/Song channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds. It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the optimum balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are applied. Basic Procedure 1 Press the [MIXER/EQ] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. 3 2 Press the [MIXER/EQ] button repeatedly to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts. The part category (Panel, Style, Song) is indicated at the top of the display. 9 PANEL Entire Song part, entire Style part, Multi Pad part, Mic (or Guitar) part, LEFT and RIGHT 1/2 parts STYLE (1/2 or 2/2) Page 1: Rhythm 1, 2, Bass, Chord 1, 2, Pad, Phrase 1, 2 Page 2 (only PSR-S970): Rhythm 1, 2, Audio SONG (CH 1-8 or CH 9-16) Page 1: Song channels 1 – 8 Page 2: Song channels 9 – 16 NOTE For parts that have two pages, pressing the [A] (PART) button lets you switch between the pages. NEXT PAGE PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 95 12psrs970_en_om.book 3 Page 96 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the desired page. For details about each page, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. • VOL/VOICE......Changes the Voice for each part and adjusts panning and volume for each part. • FILTER..............Adjusts the Harmonic Content (resonance) and sound brightness. • TUNE ................Pitch-related settings (tuning, transpose, etc.). • EFFECT............Selects the effect type and adjusts the depth for each part. • EQ .....................Boosts/cuts the high band or low band for each part to correct the tone or timbre of the sound. • MEQ ..................Selects the master equalizer type applied to the entire sound and edit the related parameters. • CMP ..................This is the Master Compressor setting which determines the dynamics of the overall sound. 4 5 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select a parameter, then use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons to set the value for each part. Save your Mixing Console settings. • To save the PANEL display settings: Register them to Registration Memory (page 85). • To save the STYLE display settings: Save them as Style data. If you want to recall the settings for future use, select the Style file saved here. 1. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [A] STYLE CREATOR 2. Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. 3. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, then save it (page 28). • To save the SONG display settings: First register the edited settings as part of the Song data, then save the Song. If you want to recall the settings for future use, select the Song file saved here. 1. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [F] MENU 2  [B] SONG CREATOR 2. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the SETUP tab. 3. Use the [8 ] (APPLY) buttons to actually apply the settings. 4. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display, then save it (page 28). Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 9. 96 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE The MEQ and CMP settings are not applied to audio playback or the metronome sound. NOTE You can instantly set the same value for the parameter to all of the parts, if you simultaneously hold down one of the [A] – [J] buttons and use the [1 ] – [8 ] buttons (or the Data dial). 12psrs970_en_om.book 10 Page 97 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – This chapter covers the connectors of this instrument. To see where the connectors are located on the instrument, refer to pages 14 – 15. CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. The FC4/FC4A or FC5 footswitches and the FC7 foot controller (sold separately) can be connected to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks. A footswitch can be used for switching functions on and off, while a foot controller controls continuous parameters such as volume. NOTE Do not connect or disconnect the pedal when the power is on. Foot Pedals FC4/FC4A FC5 FC7 By default, each jack features the following function. Use the FC4/FC4A or FC5 footswitch. • FOOT PEDAL [1] ..... Switches sustain on or off. • FOOT PEDAL [2] ..... Controls the Super Articulation Voices (page 37). You can also change the function assignments to the pedals as desired. • Example: Controlling Song Start/Stop by footswitch Connect a footswitch (FC4/FC4A or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks. To assign the function to the connected pedal, select “SONG PLAY/PAUSE” in the operation display: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E] FOOT PEDAL. 10 NOTE For details on functions that can be assigned to the pedals, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10. Assigning specific functions to each foot pedal: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1 [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E] FOOT PEDAL PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Connecting a Footswitch/Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL jacks) 97 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 98 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connecting Audio Devices (OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks, [AUX IN] jack) NOTE Using an External Stereo System for Playback You can connect a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound by using the OUTPUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks. Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. NOTE Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. NOTICE Powered speaker Input jack Phone plug (standard) Phone plug (standard) Audio signal Audio cable You can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. To avoid possible damage, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Since this instrument’s power may automatically be turned off due to the Auto Power Off function (page 17), turn off the power to the external device, or disable Auto Power Off when you do not intend to operate the instrument. NOTICE Do not route the output from the OUTPUT jacks to the [AUX IN] jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jack is output from the [OUTPUT] jacks and then back again, creating a feedback loop that could make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the equipment. Playing a Portable Audio Player with the Built-in Speakers You can connect the headphone jack of a portable audio player to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack, letting you hear the sound of that portable audio player through the built-in speakers of the instrument. NOTICE To avoid damage to the devices, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Portable audio player Headphone jack Phone plug (stereo mini) Phone plug (stereo mini) Audio signal Audio cable The input signal from the [AUX IN] jack is affected by the setting of the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial, and the volume balance with other sounds played on the keyboard can be adjusted from the BALANCE display (page 57). 98 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual NOTE You can also adjust the input volume by using the LIVE CONTROL knobs. For instructions on how to assign the functions to the knobs, refer to page 40. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 99 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connecting an External Monitor ([RGB OUT] terminal) (PSR-S970) By connecting an external monitor to the [RGB OUT] terminal of the instrument, you can have the lyrics, text and display of the instrument’s LCD shown on the monitor. CAUTION Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain. Selecting Display Contents for the External Monitor 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1 [J] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] CONFIG 2 2 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “1 SPEAKER/DISPLAY OUT.” Press the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons to select the display contents. NOTE If the display is not aligned properly in the external monitor, change the settings on the monitor itself. When you select “LYRICS/TEXT,” the connected monitor shows the LYRICS or TEXT display regardless of what is shown on the instrument’s LCD. When you select “LCD,” the monitor shows the same contents as shown on the instrument’s LCD. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Mini D-Sub 15-pin 10 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar ([MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack) You can connect a microphone or guitar to the [MIC/GUITAR INPUT] jack (standard 1/4” phone jack). For instructions, refer to page 88. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 99 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 100 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connecting USB Devices ([USB TO DEVICE] terminal) You can connect a USB flash drive or a USB wireless LAN adaptor (sold separately) to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. This lets you save data you’ve created on the instrument to the USB flash drive (page 28). You can also connect the instrument to a smart device such as iPad via wireless LAN (page 102). Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices • USB flash drive • USB hub • USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01; may not be available depending on your area) Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://download.yamaha.com/ Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading from the USB device may differ depending on the type of data or the status of the instrument. NOTE The rating of the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself. Connecting a USB device When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. NOTE • If you intend to connect two devices at the same time to a terminal, you should use a bus-powered USB hub. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. Using a USB flash drive By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Maximum number of USB flash drives allowed Up to two USB flash drives can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB flash devices that can be used simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) Formatting a USB flash drive You should format the USB flash drive only with this instrument (page 101). A USB flash drive formatted on another device may not operate properly. NOTICE The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drives. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect. Turning off the instrument NOTICE • Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device while executing playback/recording and file management operations (such as Save, Copy, Delete and Format), or when accessing the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the data. • When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations. 100 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by playback/recording or file management (such as during Save, Copy, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 101 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Formatting a USB Flash Drive When a USB flash drive is connected, a message may appear prompting you to format the USB flash drive. If so, carry out the format operation. 1 Connect a USB flash drive for formatting into the [USB TO DEVICE]. 2 Call up the operation display. NOTICE The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB flash drives. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [F] USB NOTE Playback of Style, Song and Multi Pads will stop when formatting is started. 3 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the drive to be formatted from the drive list. The indications USB 1 and USB 2 will be displayed depending on the number of the connected drives. 4 Press the [H] (FORMAT) button to format the USB flash drive. 5 Press the [G] (YES) button to actually carry out the Format operation. NOTE To cancel the Format operation, press the [H] (NO) button. Confirming the remaining memory You can check the remaining memory of the connected USB flash drive by pressing the [F] (PROPERTY) button. Selecting Files in a USB Flash Drive By pressing the [USB] button, you can access the files which are saved in the USB flash drive. 10 Select the desired category by using the [A] – [C] and [F] – [H] buttons, then select files by pressing one of the [A] – [J] buttons. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 4 101 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 102 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connecting to an iPhone/iPad ([USB TO DEVICE], [USB TO HOST] and MIDI terminals) You can use a smart device, such as an iPhone or iPad, with the instrument for a variety of musical purposes by connecting it to the instrument. By using application tools on your smart device, you can take advantage of convenient functions and get more enjoyment out of this instrument. You can make connections by one of the following methods. • Connect to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal via the USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01, sold separately). • Connect to the [USB TO HOST] terminal via the USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/ iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1, sold separately), etc. • Connect to the MIDI terminals via the MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-MX1, sold separately). *These accessories may not be available depending on your area. For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” and the Reference Manual on the website. For information about the compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ NOTICE Do not place your iPhone/iPad in an unstable position. Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in damage. NOTE • Before using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, be sure to read “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 100. • When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. Connecting to a Computer ([USB TO HOST] terminal) By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-related Operations” on the website. NOTICE Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. NOTE • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. USB cable 102 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 103 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Connecting External MIDI Devices (MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals) Use the MIDI [IN]/[OUT] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices (keyboard, sequencer, etc.). • MIDI IN ....................Receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device. • MIDI OUT ...............Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument to another MIDI device. MIDI OUT MIDI device MIDI transmit MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI receive (playback) For detailed information about MIDI settings such as transmit/receive channels on the instrument, refer to the Reference Manual on the website. NOTE For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to “MIDI Basics,” which is downloadable from the website. Advanced Features Refer to the Reference Manual on the website, Chapter 10. MIDI settings: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [I] MIDI Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – MIDI IN 10 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 103 12psrs970_en_om.book 11 Page 104 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Other Functions – Making Global Settings and Using Advanced Features – The Function menu provides a variety of convenient settings and tools for the instrument. These include general settings that affect the entire instrument, as well as detailed settings for specific functions. Also included are advanced Creator features, such as for Styles, Songs and Multi Pads. Basic Procedure 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  TAB [E][F] MENU 1/MENU 2 2 Press one of the [A] – [J] buttons to call up the desired function page. For information on what you can do on each page, refer to the Function List on page 105. 3 4 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up desired page. Change the settings or carry out the operation. Refer to the Function List on page 105 to see where you can find detailed information. 104 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 105 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Function List This list briefly explains what you can do in the displays which are called up via the [FUNCTION] button. For more information, refer to the page and chapter references indicated below. A SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING B HARMONY/ARPEGGIO C REGIST SEQUENCE/ FREEZE Owner’s Manual Description Reference Manual SPLIT POINT Determines the Split Point. page 58 - CHORD FINGERING Determines the Chord Fingering type. page 52 Chapter 2 For selecting the Harmony type or the Arpeggio type. page 42 Chapter 1 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE Determines the order for calling up Registration Memory settings when using the TAB [E][F] buttons or the pedal. - Chapter 7 FREEZE Determines the setting groups (Voice, Style, etc.) that are to remain unchanged even when you call up panel setups via Registration Memory. - Chapter 7 FOOT PEDAL Determines the functions assigned to the pedals. - Chapter 10 KEYBOARD/PANEL For setting the Touch Response of the keyboard, or selecting the part(s) to be affected by the [MODULATION] wheel or the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons. page 39 Chapter 1 MASTER TUNE For fine-tuning the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2 Hz steps. page 38 Chapter 1 SCALE TUNE Determines the scale type and tuning of the pitch of the desired note (key) in cents. page 38 Chapter 1 D CONTROLLER E MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE F VOICE SET FILTER For disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.). - Chapter 1 G STYLE SETTING For making Style playback related settings such as OTS Link timing, Dynamics Control, etc. - Chapter 2 H SONG SETTING For making Song playback related settings such as Guide Function, Channel settings, Repeat settings, etc. - Chapter 3 I MIDI J UTILITY - Chapter 11 CONFIG 1 For making general settings such as Fade in/out time, metronome sound, Tap Tempo sound, Auto Power Off. For making MIDI-related settings. page 17 Chapter 11 CONFIG 2 For making general settings such as speaker, display, etc. page 99 Chapter 11 PARAMETER LOCK Determines the parameters (effect, Split Point, etc.) that are to remain unchanged when the panel setups are changed via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, etc. - Chapter 11 USB Contains operations related to a connected USB flash drive, such as formatting and confirmation of memory size. page 101 Chapter 11 Owner’s Manual Reference Manual MENU 2 Description STYLE CREATOR For creating a Style by editing the preset Style, or by recording Style channels one by one. - Chapter 2 B SONG CREATOR For creating a Song by editing the recorded Song or by entering events one by one. - Chapter 3 C MULTI PAD CREATOR For creating a Multi Pad by editing an existing preset Multi Pad, or by recording a new one. - Chapter 5 F PACK INSTALLATION For installing Expansion Packs for adding extra contents downloaded from the website or created on your own by using the Yamaha Expansion Manager. - Chapter 1 A G H SYSTEM WIRELESS LAN OWNER For setting the Owner name, Message language, etc. page 18 Chapter 11 BACKUP/RESTORE For backing up or restoring the settings and data saved in the USER drive of the instrument. page 34 - SETUP FILES For saving and recalling the specified settings of the instrument. - Chapter 11 RESET For restoring instrument settings to their factory defaults. - Chapter 11 For making settings for connecting the instrument to a smart device, such as an iPad, via wireless LAN. This appears only when a USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected. - Chapter 10 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 105 Other Functions – Making Global Settings and Using Advanced Features – MENU 1 11 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 106 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Direct Access Chart Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press one of the buttons (or move the appropriate knob, wheel or pedal) listed below to call up the desired display. Control Display called up with the Direct Access function STYLE CONTROL STYLE SONG [TAP TEMPO] TEMPO [METRONOME] [FADE IN/OUT] TRANSPOSE UPPER OCTAVE MULTI PAD [ACMP] [AUTO FILL IN] [OTS LINK] [BREAK] INTRO [I], [II], [III] MAIN VARIATION [A], [B], [C], [D] ENDING/rit. [I], [II], [III] [SYNC START] [SYNC STOP] [START/STOP] STYLE category selection buttons [GUIDE] [SCORE] [LYRICS/TEXT] [TR 1], [TR 2], [EXTRA TR] [REPEAT] [H] (FF) [G] (RW) [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) [J] (STOP) [REC] [SELECT] [+], [-] [+], [-] [+], [-] [SELECT] [STOP] [1], [2], [3], [4] [DEMO] [FUNCTION] [MIXER/EQ] [BAL.] [CHANNEL ON/OFF] [USB] [USB AUDIO PLAYER] TAB [E], [F] [ENTER] [EXIT] Data dial PART SELECT [LEFT] PART SELECT [RIGHT1] PART SELECT [RIGHT2] PART ON/OFF [LEFT] VOICE PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] PART ON/OFF [RIGHT2] [LEFT HOLD] VOICE category selection buttons [HARMONY/ARPEGGIO] [TOUCH] [SUSTAIN] VOICE CONTROL [MONO] [DSP] [VARI.] [MUSIC FINDER] ONE TOUCH SETTING [1], [2], [3], [4] (PSR-S970) [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] (PSR-S770) [MIC SETTING] REGIST BANK [+], [-] [FREEZE] REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], [8] FOOT PEDAL [1], [2] [MODULATION] [PITCH BEND] LIVE CONTROL [1], [2] [ASSIGN] 106 SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING CHORD FINGERING STYLE SETTING FUNCTION SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING SPLIT POINT STYLE SETTING GUIDE/CHANNEL OTHERS GUIDE/CHANNEL FUNCTION SONG SETTING OTHERS FUNCTION FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE UTILITY STYLE SETTING GUIDE/CHANNEL OTHERS CONFIG 1 UTILITY CONFIG 1 CONTROLLER KEYBOARD/PANEL TUNE MULTI PAD Selection display MULTIPAD EDIT FUNCTION FUNCTION OWNER SYSTEM MIDI MIXING CONSOLE TAP METRONOME FADE IN/OUT TRANSPOSE ASSIGN VOL/VOICE FUNCTION UTILITY USB AUDIO File Selection display (called up only when a USB flash drive is connected.) MAIN - FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION VOICE SET FILTER SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING VOICE SET FILTER HARMONY/ARPEGGIO CONTROLLER MIXING CONSOLE MUSIC FINDER OTS INFORMATION MIC/GUITAR SETTING FUNCTION PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual SPLIT POINT KEYBOARD/PANEL TOUCH RESPONSE EFFECT TUNE EFFECT EFFECT Effect Type Selection display MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 EQ/CMP SETTING MIC/GUITAR REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE REGISTRATION SEQUENCE FREEZE REGISTRATION SEQUENCE REGIST INFORMATION FUNCTION CONTROLLER FUNCTION CONTROLLER MIXING CONSOLE LIVE CONTROL LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 PARAMETER ASSIGN FOOT PEDAL KEYBOARD/PANEL TUNE 1, 2 MODULATION WHEEL 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 107 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Troubleshooting Overall A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. The power is automatically turned off. This is normal and due to the Auto Power Off function. If necessary, set the parameter of the Auto Power Off function (page 17). Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with an iPhone/iPad application. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. In the LCD, there are some specific points that are always lit or unlit. These are the result of defective pixels and occasionally occur in TFT-LCDs; they do not indicate a problem in operation. There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard. This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sampling system. Some Voices have a looping sound. Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the Voice. The overall volume is too low or no sound is heard. The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. All keyboard parts are set to off. Use the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1]/ [RIGHT 2]/[LEFT] button to turn it on. The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 57). Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (pages 56, 65). Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the headphones. Make sure that the Speaker setting is set to ON: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [J] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] CONFIG 2 Depending on the function assigned to the LIVE CONTROL knob or how you move the knob, you may not hear the sound properly. Check the knob settings and reset the value (page 40). The sound is distorted or noisy. The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. This may be caused by certain effects or filter settings. Check the effect or filter settings and change them accordingly, referring to the Reference Manual. Not all simultaneously played notes sound. You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 110) of the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback volume. The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 57). The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on. This may occur if a USB flash drive has been installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB flash drives may result in a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display. To avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the device. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 107 Troubleshooting The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on, which mutes the sound. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button to turn the function off. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 108 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. The language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the file/folder name (page 18). An existing file is not shown. The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed or deleted. Manually rename the file, adding the appropriate extension, on a computer. Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument. Rename the file, reducing the number of characters to 50 or less. Voice The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound. Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 35). If necessary, press the appropriate PART ON/OFF button to turn the part on. A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts. Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. This is normal. Some Voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. Style The Style does not start even when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. The Rhythm channel of the selected Style may not contain any data. Turn the [ACMP] button on and play left-hand section on the keyboard to sound the accompaniment part of the Style. Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. Make sure to play keys in the chord section of the keyboard (pages 58, 59). The Track Mute function may have been assigned to the LIVE CONTROL knob(s). Check the knob settings and reset the value (page 40). Styles in a USB flash drive cannot be selected. If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be handled by the instrument. Song Songs cannot be selected. This may be because the language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song file name. If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be handled by the instrument. Song playback does not start. The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [J] (STOP) button. In the case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied, there are some restrictions and playback may not be possible. For details, refer to page 27. Song playback stops before the Song is finished. The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn off the Guide function. The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing the [G](REW)/ [H](FF) buttons. This happens when playing back music data for which a specific, fixed tempo is set. When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 65). The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed correctly. Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly. 108 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 109 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM USB Audio Player/Recorder A message indicating the USB flash drive is unavailable appears, and the recording is aborted. Make sure to use a compatible USB flash drive (page 100). The USB flash drive may not have enough memory. Check the recordable time on the display (page 75). If you are using a USB flash drive to which data has already been recorded, check first that no important data remains on the device, then format it (page 101) and try recording again. Audio files cannot be selected. The file format may not be compatible with the instrument. The compatible formats are: MP3 and WAV. DRM protected files cannot be played back. An existing recorded file is played back at a different volume compared to when it was recorded. The audio playback volume has been changed. Setting the volume value to 100 plays back the file at the same volume as when it was recorded (page 74). Mixing Console The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice (Drum Kit, etc.) of the Style or Song from the Mixer. When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (Drum Kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again. Microphone/Vocal Harmony, Guitar The microphone or guitar input signal cannot be recorded. The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song recording. Use the USB Audio Player/Recorder function (page 74). (PSR-S970) Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound. Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 91). (PSR-S970) The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-oftune. Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony. To remedy this: • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. • Use a unidirectional microphone. • Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume control (pages 18, 57). Foot Pedal Change the polarity settings: [FUNCTION]  TAB [E] MENU 1  [D] CONTROLLER  [I] (PEDAL POLARITY). Troubleshooting The on/off setting of the footswitch connected to the FOOT PEDAL jack is reversed. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 109 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 110 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Specifications PSR-S970 Product name Size/Weight Control Interface Voices Effects Styles Songs (MIDI) Multi Pads Functions 110 PSR-S770 Digital Keyboard Digital Keyboard 1,002 mm x 437 mm x 148 mm 1,002 mm x 437 mm x 148 mm Dimensions (W x D x H) (39-7/16” x 17-3/16” x 5-13/16”) (39-7/16” x 17-3/16” x 5-13/16”) Weight 11.6 kg (25 lbs., 9 oz.) 11.1 kg (24 lbs., 8 oz.) Number of Keys 61 61 Keyboard Type Organ Organ Touch Response Hard 2, Hard 1, Medium, Soft 1, Soft 2 Hard 2, Hard 1, Medium, Soft 1, Soft 2 Pitch Bend Wheel Yes Yes Other Controllers Modulation Wheel Yes Yes Knobs 2 (Assignable) 2 (Assignable) Type TFT Color Wide VGA LCD TFT Color Wide VGA LCD Display Size 7 inch 7 inch Language English, German, French, Spanish, Italian English, German, French, Spanish, Italian Panel Language English English AWM Stereo Sampling AWM Stereo Sampling Tone Generation Tone Generation Technology Number of Polyphony (max.) 128 128 Polyphony 989 Voices + 41 Drum/SFX Kits 830 Voices + 36 Drum/SFX Kits Number of Voices + 480 XG Voices + 480 XG Voices Preset 131 S.Art!, 30 MegaVoices, 31 Sweet!, 67 S.Art!, 23 MegaVoices, 27 Sweet!, Featured Voices 74 Cool!, 89 Live!, 30 Organ Flutes! 64 Cool!, 71 Live!, 20 Organ Flutes! Compatibility XG, GS (for Song playback), GM, GM2 XG, GS (for Song playback), GM, GM2 Part Right 1, Right 2, Left Right 1, Right 2, Left Reverb Block 52 Preset + 3 User 52 Preset + 3 User Chorus Block 106 Preset + 3 User 106 Preset + 3 User DSP Block 322 Preset (with VCM) + 10 User 295 Preset + 10 User Master Compressor 5 Preset + 5 User 5 Preset + 5 User Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User 5 Preset + 2 User Part EQ 27 Parts 27 Parts Mic/Guitar Effects Noise Gate, Compressor, 3Band EQ Noise Gate, Compressor, 3Band EQ Vocal Harmony: 44 Number of Presets Synth Vocoder: 10 60 Vocal Harmony Number of User Settings * The number is the total of Vocal Harmony and Synth Vocoder Vocal Effect 23 Number of Styles 450 360 40 +Audio, 366 Pro, 31 Session, 322 Pro, 27 Session, Featured Styles 10 DJ, 3 Free Play 10 DJ, 1 Free Play Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Preset Fingering Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard INTRO x 3, MAIN VARIATION x 4, FILL x 4, INTRO x 3, MAIN VARIATION x 4, FILL x 4, Style Control BREAK, ENDING x 3 BREAK, ENDING x 3 Music Finder (Max.) 2,500 1,200 Other Features One Touch Setting (OTS) 4 for each Style 4 for each Style Style File Format (SFF), Style File Format (SFF), Compatibility Style File Format GE (SFF GE) Style File Format GE (SFF GE) Preset Number of Preset Songs 5 preset sample Songs 5 preset sample Songs Number of Tracks 16 16 Data Capacity approx. 300 KB/Song approx. 300 KB/Song Recording Quick Recording, Multi Track Recording, Quick Recording, Multi Track Recording, Recording Function Step Recording Step Recording Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1), XF SMF (Format 0 & 1), XF Data Format Recording SMF (Format 0) SMF (Format 0) Number of Multi Pad Banks 188 banks x 4 Pads 188 banks x 4 Pads Preset Audio Audio Link Yes Yes Harmony Yes Yes Arpeggio Yes Yes Voices Panel Sustain Yes Yes Mono/Poly Yes Yes Voice Information Yes Yes Style Creator Yes Yes Styles Style Recommender Yes Yes OTS Information Yes Yes PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual Page 111 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM PSR-S970 Songs Multi Pads Registration Memory Song Creator Score Display Function Lyrics Display Function Text Display Function Wallpaper Customization Guide Performance Assistant Technology (P.A.T.) Multi Pad Creator Number of Buttons Control Playback Format Functions USB Audio Player/Recorder Recording Format Recording Time (max.) Time Stretch Pitch Shift Vocal Cancel Demonstration Overall Controls Metronome Tempo Transpose Tuning Octave Button Scale Type Direct Access Miscellaneous Expandability Expansion Voice (Expansion Expansion Style Packs) Expansion Audio Style Internal Memory Storage External Drives DC IN Headphones Microphone/Guitar MIDI Storage and AUX IN Connectivity Connectivity OUTPUT RGB OUT FOOT PEDAL USB TO DEVICE USB TO HOST Amplifiers/ Speakers Amplifiers Speakers Power Supply Adaptor Power Supply Power Consumption Auto Power Off Included Accessories Separately Sold Accessories (May not be available depending on your area.) PSR-S770 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Your Tempo Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Your Tempo Yes Yes Yes 8 Registration Sequence, Freeze .wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) .mp3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz sample rate, 64–320 kbps and variable bit rate, mono/stereo) .wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) 80 minutes/Song Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 – 500 -12 – 0 – +12 414.8 – 440.0 – 466.8 Hz Yes 9 types Yes Yes (approx. 512 MB max.) Yes (internal memory) Yes (approx. 128 MB max.) Yes (approx. 13 MB max.) USB flash drive 16 V Standard stereo phone jack Yes IN, OUT Stereo mini jack L/L+R, R Yes 1 (SUSTAIN), 2 (ARTICULATION 1), Function assignable Yes Yes 15 W x 2 13 cm x 2 + 2.5 cm (dome) x 2 PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha 20 W Yes • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Online Member Product Registration • Music rest • AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha), power cord* Yes 8 Registration Sequence, Freeze .wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) .mp3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3: 44.1/48.0 kHz sample rate, 64–320 kbps and variable bit rate, mono/stereo) .wav (WAV format: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) 80 minutes/Song Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 – 500 -12 – 0 – +12 414.8 – 440.0 – 466.8 Hz Yes 9 types Yes Yes (approx. 160 MB max.) Yes (internal memory) Yes (approx. 13 MB max.) USB flash drive 16 V Standard stereo phone jack Yes IN, OUT Stereo mini jack L/L+R, R 1 (SUSTAIN), 2 (ARTICULATION 1), Function assignable Yes Yes 15 W x 2 13 cm x 2 + 5 cm x 2 PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha 19 W Yes • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Online Member Product Registration • Music rest • AC adaptor* (PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha), power cord* * May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. * May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. • AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150 • Footswitches: FC4/FC4A/FC5 • Foot controller: FC7 • USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad: i-UX1 • MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/ iPad: i-MX1 • USB wireless LAN adaptor: UD-WL01 • USB-MIDI Interface: UX16 • Keyboard stand: L-6/L-7 • AC adaptor: PA-300C or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150 • Footswitches: FC4/FC4A/FC5 • Foot controller: FC7 • USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad: i-UX1 • MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/ iPad: i-MX1 • USB wireless LAN adaptor: UD-WL01 • USB-MIDI Interface: UX16 • Keyboard stand: L-6/L-7 (The exterior size of the PSR-S970/S770 is beyond the limits as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument.) (The exterior size of the PSR-S970/S770 is beyond the limits as described in the L-6 Assembly Instructions. However, we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument.) * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. Since Yamaha makes continuous improvements to the product, this manual may not apply to the specifications of your particular product. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 111 Specifications 12psrs970_en_om.book 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 112 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Index A Drum Kit .......................................... 37 I A-B Repeat................................67, 73 Drum Setup ..................................... 60 Intro (Style) ..................................... 50 AC adaptor..............................16, 111 DSP ................................................. 42 iPhone/iPad................................... 102 Accompaniment ..............................48 Arpeggio ...................................44, 47 Audio Link Multi Pad .......................78 Audio Player ....................................71 Audio Recorder ...............................74 Audio Style ...................................... 49 Auto Fill............................................51 Auto Power Off ................................17 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual ...... 7 E Echo................................................ 42 K Effect......................................... 42, 96 Keyboard part................................. 35 Ending (Style) ................................. 50 Knob ............................................... 40 EQ (Equalizer)................................. 96 Expansion Pack ........................ 46, 47 L AUX IN.............................................98 B Backup ............................................34 Balance .....................................57, 74 Break (Style)....................................51 Language ....................................... 18 F Layer............................................... 35 Factory Reset .................................. 33 Left Hold ......................................... 37 Fade In/Out ..................................... 52 LEFT part ........................................ 35 Fast Forward ............................. 63, 73 LIVE CONTROL knob ..................... 40 File ............................................ 26, 27 LOWER ........................................... 59 File Selection display ...................... 26 Lyrics .............................................. 65 Fill-in................................................ 51 C Filter ................................................ 96 Channel (Song) ...............................65 Fingering type ................................. 52 M Channel (Style)................................56 Folder.............................................. 29 Main (Style)..................................... 51 Character entry ...............................32 Foot controller ................................. 97 Main display ................................... 24 Chord detection area ......................59 Footage........................................... 45 Master Compressor (CMP)............. 96 Chord Fingering type ......................52 Footswitch ....................................... 97 Master EQ (MEQ) ........................... 96 Chord Match ...................................77 Format (Compatibility) ...................... 8 Master Tune.................................... 38 Chord Tutor ..................................... 53 Format (USB flash drive)............... 101 MegaVoice...................................... 37 Chordal............................................91 Freeze ............................................. 87 MENU ..................................... 26, 105 Function ........................................ 104 MEQ (Master EQ) ........................... 96 CMP (Master Compressor) .............96 Metronome...................................... 37 Computer ......................................102 Computer-related Operations ...........7 Connection ...................................... 97 Copy................................................30 D Microphone..................................... 88 G MIDI .............................................. 103 GM .............................................. 8, 47 Mixing Console (Mixer)................... 95 GS ..................................................... 8 Modulation wheel............................ 39 Guide .............................................. 66 Monitor............................................ 99 Guitar .............................................. 88 Mono............................................... 42 Data dial ..........................................22 Data List ............................................7 Delete ..............................................31 Demo...............................................19 Direct Access..........................23, 106 Move ............................................... 30 H Harmony ................................... 42, 47 Headphones ................................... 15 DJ Style ...........................................49 112 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual MP3................................................. 71 Multi Pad......................................... 76 Multi Pad Creator............................ 79 Multi Track Recording .................... 69 Music Finder ................................... 80 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 113 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Music notation .................................64 RGB OUT ........................................ 99 Upper Octave ................................. 38 Music rest........................................14 RIGHT part ...................................... 35 USB (File Selection display) ........... 26 USB Audio Player/Recorder ........... 71 USB flash drive ..................... 100, 101 N S Name...............................................30 S.Art! (Super Articulation Voice) ..... 37 USB wireless LAN adaptor ... 100, 102 USER (File Selection display) ......... 26 Save ................................................ 28 O One Touch Setting (OTS) ................ 53 Organ Flutes Voice..........................45 Scale Tune ...................................... 38 Score............................................... 64 V Section ............................................ 51 Vocal Cancel .................................. 73 SFF (Style File Format) ................ 8, 49 Vocal Harmony ............................... 91 SFX Kit ............................................ 37 Vocoder .......................................... 91 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ............... 62 Vocoder Mono ................................ 91 Song................................................ 62 Voice............................................... 35 P Song Creator................................... 70 Voice Set......................................... 47 P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology) ....................................70 Speaker................................... 98, 105 Volume (Audio) ............................... 73 Specifications ............................... 110 Volume (Master volume)................. 18 Parameter Lock .............................105 Split ................................................. 35 Volume Balance........................ 57, 74 Part (Voice)...................................... 35 Split Point ........................................ 58 Part EQ ............................................96 Standard MIDI File (SMF) ............... 62 Pause ........................................63, 73 Step Recording (Song) ................... 70 Pedal .......................................97, 105 Step Recording (Style).................... 61 Performance Assistant Technology (P.A.T.) ............................................70 Style ................................................ 48 Phrase Mark ....................................64 Style File Format (SFF) ................ 8, 49 Pitch ................................... 38, 73, 96 Style Recommender ....................... 55 Pitch Bend wheel ............................39 Style Retrigger ................................ 40 Pitch Shift ........................................73 Super Articulation Voice ................. 37 Playback (Audio File) ......................71 Sustain ............................................ 42 Playback (Song)..............................62 Synchro Start (Multi Pad) ................ 77 Playback (Style) ..............................48 Synchro Start (Song)....................... 63 Power ..............................................16 Synchro Start (Style) ....................... 50 PRESET (File Selection display)......26 Synchro Stop .................................. 50 Protected Song ...............................27 Synth Vocoder ................................ 93 Q T Quick Recording .............................68 Talk ................................................. 90 OTS (One Touch Setting) ................ 53 OTS Link..........................................54 W WAV .......................................... 71, 78 Wireless LAN ........................ 102, 105 Style Creator ................................... 60 X XF...................................................... 8 XG............................................... 8, 47 Tap Tempo...................................... 51 Record (Music Finder) ....................80 Recording (Audio)...........................74 Recording (Song)............................68 Reference Manual .............................7 Registration Memory .......................85 Registration Sequence....................87 Tempo....................................... 51, 73 Index R Text ................................................. 65 Time Stretch .................................... 73 Touch Response....................... 42, 47 Transpose ................................. 38, 96 Troubleshooting ............................ 107 Tuning ....................................... 38, 96 Repeat................................ 67, 73, 74 Repertoire........................................54 U Reset ...............................................33 UPPER ............................................ 59 Rewind ......................................63, 73 PSR-S970/S770 Owner’s Manual 113 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 114 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. (weee_eu_en_01) Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques. Le symbole sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels. Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC. En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d'un traitement inapproprié des déchets. Pour plus d'informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits. [Pour les professionnels dans l'Union Européenne] Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d'informations. [Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de l'Union Européenne] Ce symbole est seulement valable dans l'Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée. (weee_eu_fr_01) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 115 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 116 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM 1-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY ON ARRANGER WORKSTATION KEYBOARDS Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by Yamaha. ©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America. 12psrs970_en_om.book Page 117 Friday, June 26, 2015 3:33 PM For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”, Col. San Jose Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juarez, 03900, Mexico, D.F. Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 54-11-4119-7000 VENEZUELA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Venezuela C.C. Manzanares Plaza P4 Ofic. 0401- Manzanares-Baruta Caracas Venezuela Tel: 58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso No.7, Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48 22 88 00 888 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 DMI10 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activites Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrensgata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46 31 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1361 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 78 00 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sokak No:5 Spring Giz Plaza Bağımsız Böl. No:3, 34398 Şişli, İstanbul Tel: +90-212-999-8010 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA/MIDDLE EAST ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 65-6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063 Taiwan Tel: 02-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com SOUTH AFRICA Global Music Instruments World of Yamaha 19 Eastern Service Road, Eastgate Ext.6, Sandton, South Africa Tel: +27-11-259-7700 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2015 Yamaha Corporation Published 07/2015 POZC*.*-**B0 Printed in Indonesia ZP52790